BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844


Problem Determination and Service Guide

BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844


Problem Determination and Service Guide

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page
173, and the Warranty and Support Information document on the IBM BladeCenter Documentation CD.

Sixth Edition (November 2010)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2007.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for trained service technicians . . . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . . .
viii . . . . . . . .
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Blade server control panel buttons and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Turning on the blade server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Turning off the blade server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System-board layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System-board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System-board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
System-board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Chapter 2. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
POST checkpoint codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Progress codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Attention codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Service request numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the SRN tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SRN tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Failing function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
About the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Verifying the partition configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Running the diagnostics program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Starting AIX concurrent diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Starting standalone diagnostics from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Starting standalone diagnostics from a NIM server . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using the diagnostics program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Boot problem resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Troubleshooting tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CD or DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diskette drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Intermittent problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Microprocessor problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Monitor or video problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Network connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Optional device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 iii

 Service processor problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Viewing the light path diagnostics LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Light path diagnostics LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Firmware problem isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recovering the system firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Starting the PERM image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recovering the TEMP image from the PERM image. . . . . . . . . . 128
Verifying the system firmware levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Committing the TEMP system firmware image . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Solving shared BladeCenter resource problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Media tray problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Network connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Video problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Calling IBM for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Chapter 3. Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components . . . . . 141

Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Returning a device or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Removing the blade server from a BladeCenter unit . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Installing the blade server in a BladeCenter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Removing the blade server cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Installing the blade server cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Removing the bezel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Installing the bezel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing a SAS hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing a SAS hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Removing and installing an I/O expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Removing a hard disk drive tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing a hard disk drive tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the expansion bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Installing the expansion bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Replacing the system-board and chassis assembly . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions . . . . . . . . 165

Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configuring the blade server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using the SMS utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting the SMS utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
SMS utility menu choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

iv BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Creating a CE login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Blade server Ethernet controller enumeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring a SAS RAID array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Updating IBM Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Checking the status of the media tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . 171

Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . 171
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
IBM Taiwan product service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Product recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Battery return program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . . 178
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . . 178
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 178
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement . . . . . . . . 178
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . . 178
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chinese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement 179

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Contents v
vi BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.

Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.

Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.

Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.

Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.

Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.

Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.

Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.

Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.

Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.

Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 vii

Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.

Inspecting for unsafe conditions

Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
an IBM product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed and
manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service technicians
from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items. Use good
judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by non-IBM
alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not addressed in
this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the
hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you work on the
product.

Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.

To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in the
documentation for your BladeCenter unit type.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the blade server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal
filings, contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.

Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment

Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical current.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.

viii BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When using a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when measuring high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.

Safety statements
Important:

Each caution and danger statement in this documentation begins with a number.
This number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.

For example, if a caution statement begins with a number 1, translations for that
caution statement appear in the Safety Information document under statement 1.

Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this documentation before
performing the instructions. Read any additional safety information that comes with
your blade server or optional device before you install the device.

Safety ix
 Statement 1:

DANGER

Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is

hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.

To Connect: To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF.

2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet. 4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.

x BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

Statement 3:

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

Safety xi
 Statement 4:

≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb) ≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb) ≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)

CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

1 2

xii BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Statement 10:

CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

Safety xiii
xiv BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction
This Problem Determination and Service Guide contains information to help you
solve problems that might occur in your IBM® BladeCenter® JS21 Type 7988 or
8844 blade server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the blade server,
error codes and suggested actions, and instructions for replacing failing
components.

Replaceable components are of three types:

v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your blade server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

Related documentation
In addition to this document, the following documentation also comes with the blade
server:
v Installation and User’s Guide
This printed document contains general information about the blade server,
including how to install supported options and how to configure the blade server.
v Safety Information
This document is in Portable Document Format (PDF) on the Documentation CD.
It contains translated caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger
statement that appears in the documentation has a number that you can use to
locate the corresponding statement in your language in the Safety Information
document.
v Warranty and Support Information
This document is in PDF on the Documentation CD. It contains information about
the terms of the warranty and about service and assistance.

Depending on the blade server model, additional documentation might be included

on the Documentation CD.

The blade server might have features that are not described in the documentation
that comes with the blade server. The documentation might be updated occasionally
to include information about those features, or technical updates might be available
to provide additional information that is not included in the blade server
documentation. The most recent versions of all BladeCenter documentation are at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

In addition to the documentation in this library, be sure to review the IBM

BladeCenter Planning and Installation Guide for your BladeCenter unit type for
information to help you prepare for system installation and configuration. This
document is also available at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 1

Notices and statements in this document
The caution and danger statements that appear in this document are also in the
multilingual Safety Information document, which is on the Documentation CD. Each
statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding statement in the Safety
Information document.

The following notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage could occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

2 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Features and specifications
The following table is a summary of the features and specifications of the JS21
Types 7988 and 8844 blade servers operating in a non-NEBS/ETSI (a non-Network
Equipment Building System/European Telecommunications Standards Institute)
environment.

Notes:
v Power, cooling, removable-media drives, external ports, and advanced system
management are provided by the BladeCenter unit.
v The operating system in the blade server must provide USB support for the blade
server to recognize and use the removable-media drives and front-panel USB
ports. The BladeCenter unit uses USB for internal communications with these
devices.

Microprocessor: Integrated functions: Electrical input: 12 V dc

v Two 1 Gigabit Ethernet controllers
Support for: Environment:
v Expansion card interface v Air temperature:
v Two single-core, 64-bit, IBM
PowerPC® 970MP microprocessors v Intelligent Platform Management – Blade server on: 10° to 35°C (50°
(2.7 GHz in BladeCenter H unit, 2.6 Interface (IPMI) to 95°F). Altitude: 0 to 914 m
GHz in other BladeCenter units) or v Baseboard management controller (3000 ft)
(BMC) with IPMI firmware – Blade server on: 10° to 32°C (50°
v Two dual-core, 64-bit, IBM
to 90°F). Altitude: 914 m to 2133
PowerPC 970MP microprocessors v ATI RN50 ES1000 video controller
m (3000 ft to 7000 ft)
(2.5 GHz in BladeCenter H unit, 2.3 v SAS RAID controller
– Blade server off: -40° to 60°C
GHz in other BladeCenter units)
v Light path diagnostics (-40° to 140°F)
Memory: v Local service processor (BMC) v Humidity:
– Blade server on: 8% to 80%
v Dual-channel (DDR2) with 4 DIMM v RS-485 interface for – Blade server off: 5% to 80%
slots communication with the
v Supports 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, and management module Size:
4 GB DIMMs, for a maximum of 16 v Automatic server restart (ASR) v Height: 24.5 cm (9.7 inches)
GB (as of the date of this v Serial over LAN (SOL) v Depth: 44.6 cm (17.6 inches)
publication)
v Four Universal Serial Bus (USB) v Width: 2.9 cm (1.14 inches)
v Supports 2-way interleaved, DDR2, buses for communication with
PC2-3200 or PC2-4200, ECC v Maximum weight: 5.0 kg (11 lb)
keyboard, diskette drive, and CD
SDRAM registered x4 (Chipkill) drive
DIMMs
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA)
Drives: Support for two internal alerts:
small-form-factor Serial Attached SCSI
v Microprocessor
(SAS) drives
v Memory

Chapter 1. Introduction 3
Blade server control panel buttons and LEDs
This section describes the blade server control panel buttons and LEDs.

Note: The control panel door is shown in the closed (normal) position in the
following illustration. To access the power-control button, you must open the control
panel door.

Activity LED

Location LED

Keyboard/video select button Information LED

Blade-error LED
Media-tray select
button

Power-control button
Power-on LED

Keyboard/video select button: When using a supported Linux operating system,

press this button to associate the shared BladeCenter unit keyboard and video
ports with the blade server.

Notes:
v The use of a mouse or pointing device is not supported by the JS21 blade
server.
v The Linux operating system in the blade server must provide USB support for the
blade server to recognize and use the keyboard, even if the keyboard has a
PS/2-style connector.
v The keyboard and video are available after the Linux operating system loads.
Power-on self-test (POST) codes and diagnostics are not supported using the
keyboard and video.
v For information about supported Linux operating systems, see
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

The LED on this button flashes while the request is being processed, then is lit
when the ownership of the keyboard and video has been transferred to the blade
server. It can take approximately 20 seconds to switch the keyboard and video
control to the blade server.

Using a keyboard that is directly attached to the management module, you can
press keyboard keys in the following sequence to switch keyboard and video control
between blade servers:
NumLock NumLock blade_server_number Enter

4 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Where blade_server_number is the two-digit number for the blade bay in which
the blade server is installed. When using some keyboards, such as the 28L3644
(37L0888) keyboard, you will need to hold down the Shift key while entering this
key sequence.

If there is no response when you press the keyboard/video select button, you can
use the management-module Web interface to determine whether local control has
been disabled on the blade server.

Activity LED: When this green LED is lit, it indicates that there is activity on the
hard disk drive or network.

Location LED: When this blue LED is lit, it has been turned on by the system
administrator to aid in visually locating the blade server. The location LED can be
turned off through the management-module Web interface or through IBM Director
Console.

Information LED: When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
system error for the blade server has been placed in the Management Module
Event Log. The information LED can be turned off through the management-module
Web interface or through IBM Director Console.

Blade-error LED: When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has
occurred in the blade server. The blade-error LED will turn off only after the error is
corrected.

Media-tray select button: Press this button to associate the shared BladeCenter
unit media tray (removable-media drives and front-panel USB ports) with the blade
server. The LED on the button flashes while the request is being processed, then is
lit when the ownership of the media tray has been transferred to the blade server. It
can take approximately 20 seconds for the operating system in the blade server to
recognize the media tray.

If there is no response when you press the media-tray select button, you can use
the management-module Web interface to determine whether local control has been
disabled on the blade server.

Note: The operating system in the blade server must provide USB support for the
blade server to recognize and use the removable-media drives and USB ports.

Power-control button: This button is behind the control panel door. Press this
button to turn on or turn off the blade server.

Note: The power-control button has effect only if local power control is enabled for
the blade server. Local power control is enabled and disabled through the
management-module Web interface.

Power-on LED: This green LED indicates the power status of the blade server in
the following manner:
v Flashing rapidly: The service processor (BMC) on the blade server is
communicating with the management module.
v Flashing slowly: The blade server has power but is not turned on.
v Lit continuously: The blade server has power and is turned on.

Chapter 1. Introduction 5
Turning on the blade server
After you connect the blade server to power through the BladeCenter unit, the blade
server can start in any of the following ways:
v You can press the power-control button on the front of the blade server (behind
the control panel door, see “Blade server control panel buttons and LEDs” on
page 4) to start the blade server.
Notes:
1. Wait until the power-on LED on the blade server flashes slowly before
pressing the blade server power-control button. If the power-on LED is
flashing rapidly, the service processor in the management module is
initializing; therefore, the power-control button on the blade server does not
respond.
2. While the blade server is starting, the power-on LED on the front of the blade
server is lit. See “Blade server control panel buttons and LEDs” on page 4 for
the power-on LED states.
v If a power failure occurs, the BladeCenter unit and then the blade server can
start automatically when power is restored (if the blade server is configured
through the management module to do so).
v You can turn on the blade server remotely by using the management module.
v If the blade server is connected to power (the power-on LED is flashing slowly),
the operating system supports the Wake on LAN feature, and the Wake on LAN
feature has not been disabled through the management module, the Wake on
LAN feature can turn on the blade server. However, the blade server can only
receive the Wake on LAN command through the ethernet ports that are
integrated into the system board, not through the ethernet ports on an installed
I/O expansion card.

6 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Turning off the blade server
When you turn off the blade server, it is still connected to power through the
BladeCenter unit. The blade server can respond to requests from the service
processor, such as a remote request to turn on the blade server. To remove all
power from the blade server, you must remove it from the BladeCenter unit.

Shut down the operating system before you turn off the blade server. See the
operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the operating
system.

The blade server can be turned off in any of the following ways:
v You can press the power-control button on the blade server (behind the control
panel door, see “Blade server control panel buttons and LEDs” on page 4). This
also starts an orderly shutdown of the operating system, if this feature is
supported by the operating system.

Note: After turning off the blade server, wait at least 5 seconds before you press
the power-control button to turn on the blade server again.
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the blade server.
v The management module can turn off the blade server.

System-board layouts
The following illustrations show the connectors, jumpers, and LEDs on the system
board. The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

System-board connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors on the system board.
I/O expansion option (J18)
I/O expansion option (J22)
Blade expansion option (J200)
DIMM 1 (J400)
DIMM 2 (J401)
DIMM 3 (J402)
DIMM 4 (J403)

Hard disk drive 0 (J500) Control panel (J4)

Hard disk drive 1 (J501) Battery (BH1)

Chapter 1. Introduction 7
System-board jumpers
The following illustration shows the jumpers on the system board.

BIOS code page jumper (J14)

3
2
1

System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board. You have to remove
the blade server from the BladeCenter unit, open the cover, and press the light path
diagnostics switch to light any error LEDs that were turned on during processing.
DIMM 1 error LED (CR40) System-management processor error LED (CR27)
DIMM 2 error LED (CR45) NMI error LED (CR17)
DIMM 3 error LED (CR46) Temperature error LED (CR16)
DIMM 4 error LED (CR53) System board error LED (CR20)
Microprocessor 1 error LED (CR19)
I/O expansion option
error LED (CR34) Microprocessor 0 error LED (CR58)

Light path diagnostics

switch (SW1)

Hard disk drive 1 error LED (CR3)

Hard disk drive 0 error LED (CR4)

8 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 2. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the blade server.

If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this chapter,
see Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 171 for more
information.

Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v POST checkpoints
The power-on self-test (POST) in the firmware generates eight-digit checkpoint
codes. If the firmware detects a problem during POST, an eight-digit error code
will be displayed. See “POST checkpoint codes” for more information.
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 113 for more information.
v Light path diagnostics
Use the light path diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See “Light path
diagnostics” on page 124 for more information.

POST checkpoint codes

When you turn on the blade server, it performs a series of tests to check the
operation of the blade server components. This series of tests is called the
power-on self-test, or POST. During POST, a series of eight-digit progress codes
(also known as checkpoints) is displayed on the console to indicate that the blade
server is initializing system resources.

Note: You must establish an SOL session with the blade server to view the codes
described in this section; the shared BladeCenter unit video cannot display these
codes.

If the POST is completed without detecting any problems, the firmware displays a
checkpoint indicating that an operating system is being loaded. Location code
information may also display on the operator panel during this time (see “Location
codes” on page 66).

If POST detects a problem, an eight-digit error code will be displayed and logged in
the BladeCenter management module event log. See “Attention codes” on page 34
and “Error codes” on page 37 for more information. A location code might be
displayed at the same time on the second line (see “Location codes” on page 66).

Note: Some POST codes may not display on the operator panel, these codes can
be viewed using the Progress Indicator History option in the SMS utility (see “Using
the SMS utility” on page 166).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 9

 Progress codes enable users and service personnel to know what the system is
doing as it initializes. These codes are not intended to be error indicators, but in
some cases a system could hang at one of the progress codes without displaying
an eight-digit error code. Any actions associated with the progress codes should be
taken only if the system hangs.

Progress codes
The following table lists the progress codes that may be displayed by the POST,
and the suggested actions to take if the system hangs on the progress code.

In the following progress codes, X can be any number or letter.

Notes:
1. For checkpoints with no associated location code, see “Light path diagnostics”
on page 124 to identify the failing component.
2. For checkpoints with location codes, see “Location codes” on page 66.
3. For problems persisting after completing the suggested actions, see “Checkout
procedure” on page 106 and “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.
4. For eight-digit codes not listed here, see “Checkout procedure” on page 106.

v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2001000 Partition auto-startup during a platform 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
startup page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2001010 Startup source 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2001100 Adding partition resources to the 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
secondary configuration page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20011FF Partition resources added successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2001200 Checking if startup is allowed 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20012FF Partition startup is allowed to proceed 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

10 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2001300 Initializing ISL roadmap 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20013FF ISL roadmap initialized successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2001400 Initializing SP Communication Area #1 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2001410 Initializing startup parameters 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20014FF Startup parameters initialized 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
successfully page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002100 Power on racks 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002110 Issuing a power on command 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C200211F Power on command successful 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20021FF Power on phase complete 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002200 Begin acquiring slot locks 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 11
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C20022FF End acquiring slot locks 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002300 Begin acquiring VIO slot locks 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20023FF End acquiring VIO slot locks 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002400 Begin powering on slots 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002450 Waiting for power on of slots to complete 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20024FF End powering on slots 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2002500 Begin power on VIO slots 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20025FF End powering on VIO slots 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003100 Validating ISL command parameters 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003111 Waiting for bus object to become 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
operational page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

12 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2003112 Waiting for bus unit to become disabled 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003115 Waiting for creation of bus object 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003150 Sending ISL command to bus unit 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20031FF Waiting for ISL command completion 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20032FF ISL command complete successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003300 Start SoftPOR of a failed ISL slot 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2003350 Waiting for SoftPOR of a failed ISL slot 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20033FF Finish SoftPOR of a failed ISL slot 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2004100 Waiting for load source device to enlist 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2004200 Load source device has enlisted 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 13
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2004300 Preparing connection to load source 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
device page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20043FF Load source device is connected 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006000 Locating first LID information on the load 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
source page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006005 Clearing all partition main store 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006010 Locating next LID information on the 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
load source page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006020 Verifying LID information 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006030 Priming LP configuration LID 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006040 Preparing to initiate LID load from load 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
source page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006050 LP configuration LID primed successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006060 Waiting for LID load to complete 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

14 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2006100 LID load completed successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2006200 Loading raw kernel memory image 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20062FF Loading raw kernel memory image 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
completed successfully page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008040 Begin transfer slot locks to partition 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008060 End transfer slot locks to partition 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008080 Begin transfer VIO slot locks to partition 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20080A0 End transfer VIO slot locks to partition 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20080FF Hypervisor low-level session manager 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
object is ready page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008100 Initializing service processor 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
communication area #2 page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008104 Loading data structures into main store 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 15
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C2008110 Initializing event paths 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008120 Starting processor(s) 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008130 Begin associate of system ports 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008138 Associating system ports to the partition 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C200813F End associate of system ports 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20081FF Processors started successfully, now 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
waiting to receive the continue page 127.
acknowledgement from system firmware
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C2008200 Continue acknowledgement received 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
from system firmware page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C20082FF VSP startup complete successfully 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
page 127.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E200 U4 I2C Master interface Initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E201 Flash RAM CRC checksum is valid 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E202 MPIC initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

16 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C400E203 Disabling TB 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E204 CRC check of the image in RAM 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E206 Checking KCS interface for good 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
communication with BMC
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E209 SIO/COM1/GPIO initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E20A Loading 256K flash code into L2 cache 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E20C Finish Platform Hardware Probing. 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
Process Firmware LID directory
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E20F Executing from L2 cache 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E211 CRC check of the image in flash RAM 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E212 Getting CPU status and presence 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E213 Memory initialization 1. Verify that DIMMs are correctly installed and
seated, then restart server.
2. Start server from PERM image and recover
TEMP image.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E214 Pattern 1 memory test 1. Verify that DIMMs are correctly installed and
seated, then restart server.
2. Start server from PERM image and recover
TEMP image.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 17
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C400E215 Pattern 2 memory test 1. Verify that DIMMs are correctly installed and
seated, then restart server.
2. Start server from PERM image and recover
TEMP image.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E216 Clear memory 1. Verify that DIMMs are correctly installed and
seated, then restart server.
2. Start server from PERM image and recover
TEMP image.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E217 Initialize LLFW global data structure 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E218 Copying the set of flash RAM to memory 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E219 Saving the DIMM SPDs and the CPU 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
status and presence
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E21A Executing code from memory 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E21B Load PFW into memory 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E21C Executing HT initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E21D Executing PCI initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E21E Execute I/O APIC test 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E220 Read 4K system VPD eeprom Data 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

18 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
C400E22A Temp-side flash image is corrupted 1. Force the blade server to boot from the
PERM image and reject the TEMP image.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E22B Perm-side flash image is corrupted 1. Force the blade server to boot from the
TEMP image and commit the TEMP image.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E230 Read an LID entry from the LID directory 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E231 Check CRC of a PHYPL LID 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E232 Decompress a PHYPL LID image into its 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
final memory location
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E23E Checking a PHYPL LID size 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E23F Searching for a PHYPL LID 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E298 Transfer control to PHYPL following 1. Shutdown and restart the blade server.
MSD start up
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C400E299 Transfer control to PHYPL following cold 1. Shutdown and restart the blade server from
start up the permanent-side image.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
C700 xxxx A problem has occurred with the system 1. Shutdown and restart the blade server from
firmware during startup. the permanent-side image.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000000 Process control now owned by partition 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
firmware
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 19
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA000020 Checking firmware levels 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000030 Attempting to establish a communication 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
link by using lpevents
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000032 Attempting to register lpevent queues 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000034 Attempting to exchange cap and allocate 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
lpevents
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000038 Attempting to exchange virtual continue 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
lpevents
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000040 Attempting to obtain RTAS firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
details
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000050 Attempting to load RTAS firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000060 Attempting to obtain open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
details
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000070 Attempting to load open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000080 Preparing to start open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000090 Open firmware package corrupted 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
(phase 1)
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA000091 Attempting to load the second pass of C 1. Reboot the blade server.
code
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

20 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA0000A0 Open firmware package corrupted 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
(phase 2)
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D001 PCI probe process completed, create 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
PCI bridge interrupt routing properties
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D002 PCI adapter NVRAM hint created; 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
system is rebooting
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D003 PCI probing complete 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D004 Beginning of install-console, loading GUI 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
package
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D008 Initialize console and flush queues 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D00C The partition firmware is about to search 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
for an NVRAM script
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D00D Evaluating NVRAM script 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00D010 First pass open firmware initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
complete; establish parameters for
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
restart
assembly.
CA00D011 First pass open firmware initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
complete; control returned to initialization
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
firmware
assembly.
CA00D012 Second pass open firmware initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
complete; control returned to initialization
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
firmware
assembly.
CA00D013 Run-time open firmware initialization 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
complete; control returned to initialization
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
firmware
assembly.
CA00E101 Create RTAS node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 21
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E102 Load and initialize RTAS 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E105 Transfer control to operating system Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.
(normal mode boot)
CA00E10A Load RTAS device tree 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E10B Set RTAS device properties 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E110 Create KDUMP properties 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E130 Build device tree 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E131 Create root node properties 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E134 Create memory node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E135 Create HCA node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E136 Create BSR node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

22 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E137 Create HEA node 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E138 Create options node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E139 Create aliases node and system aliases 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E13A Create packages node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E13B Create HEA node 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E13C Create HEA port node 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E140 Loading operating system Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.

CA00E141 Synchronizing the operating system 1. Reboot the blade server.

bootlist to the management module
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
bootlist.
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 23
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E142 The management module bootlist is 1. Reboot the blade server.
being set from the operating system
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
bootlist.
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E143 The operating system bootlist is being 1. Reboot the blade server.
set from the management module
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
bootlist.
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E149 Create boot manager node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E14C Create terminal emulator node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E14D Load boot image Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.
CA00E150 Create host (primary) node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E151 Probing PCI bus 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E152 Probing for adapter FCODE; evaluate if 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
present
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E153 End adapter FCODE probing and 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
evaluation
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E154 Create PCI bridge node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E155 Probing PCI bridge secondary bus 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

24 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E156 Create plug-in PCI bridge node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E15B Transfer control to operating system Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.
(service mode boot)
CA00E15F Adapter VPD evaluation 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E170 Start of PCI bus probe 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E172 First pass of PCI device probe 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E174 Establishing host connection 1. Make sure that:
v The bootp server is correctly configured;
then, retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct;
then, retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with bootp server
or network, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
CA00E175 Bootp request 1. Make sure that:
v The bootp server is correctly configured;
then, retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct;
then, retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with bootp server
or network, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
CA00E176 TFTP file transfer 1. Make sure that:
v The bootp server is correctly configured;
then, retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct;
then, retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with bootp server
or network, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 25
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E177 Transfer failure due to TFTP error 1. Make sure that:
condition
v The bootp server is correctly configured;
then, retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct;
then, retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with bootp server
or network, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
CA00E178 Initiating TFTP file transfer 1. Make sure that:
v The bootp server is correctly configured,
then retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct,
then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with the bootp
server or network, replace the system board
and chassis assembly.
CA00E179 Closing BOOTP 1. Make sure that:
v The bootp server is correctly configured,
then retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct,
then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with the bootp
server or network, replace the system board
and chassis assembly.
CA00E17B Microprocessor clock speed 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
measurement
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E198 The system is rebooting to enact 1. Make sure that:
changes specified in
v The bootp server is correctly configured,
ibm,client-architecture-support
then retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct,
then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with the bootp
server or network, replace the system board
and chassis assembly.

26 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E199 The system is rebooting to enact 1. Make sure that:
changes that were specified in the boot
v The bootp server is correctly configured;
image ELF header
then, retry the operation.
v The network connections are correct;
then, retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. If no problems are found with bootp server
or network, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
CA00E19A NVRAM auto-boot? variable not found - 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
assume FALSE
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E19B NVRAM menu? variable not found - 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
assume FALSE
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E19D Create NVRAM node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1A0 User requested boot to SMS menus 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
using keyboard entry
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1A1 User requested boot to open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
prompt using keyboard entry
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1A2 User requested boot using default 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
service mode boot list using keyboard
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
entry
assembly.
CA00E1A3 User requested boot using customized 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
service mode boot list using keyboard
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
entry
assembly.
CA00E1A4 User requested boot to SMS menus 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1A5 User requested boot to open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
prompt
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1A6 User requested boot using default 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
service mode boot list
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 27
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E1A7 User requested boot using customized 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
service mode boot list
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AA System boot check for NVRAM settings 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AB System booting using default service 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
mode boot list
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AC System booting using customized 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
service mode boot list
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AD System booting to the operating system 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AE System booted to SMS multiboot menu 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
using NVRAM settings
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1AF System booted to SMS utilities menu 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
using NVRAM settings
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1B1 System booting system-directed 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
boot-device repair
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1B2 XOFF received, waiting for XON 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1B3 XON received 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1B4 System-directed boot-string did not load 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
an operating system repair
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1B5 Checking for iSCSI disk aliases 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1D0 Create PCI SCSI node 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

28 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E1D3 Create SCSI block device node (SD) 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1D4 Create SCSI byte device node (ST) 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1DC Dynamic console selection 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1DD A graphics adapter has been selected as 1. Make sure that there is a USB keyboard
the firmware console, but the USB attached to a USB port that is assigned to
keyboard is not attached. the partition.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F0 Start out-of-box experience 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F1 Start self test sequence on one or more 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
devices
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F2 Power on password prompt 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F3 Privileged-access password prompt 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F4 End self-test sequence on one or more 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
boot devices; begin system management
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
services
assembly.
CA00E1F5 Build boot device list 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F6 Determine boot device sequence 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1F7 No boot image located Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 29
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E1F8 Building boot device list for SCSI 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
adapters. (The location code of the SCSI
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
adapter being scanned is also
assembly.
displayed.)
CA00E1F9 Building boot device list for fibre-channel 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
adapters. (The location code of the SAN
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
adapter being scanned is also
assembly.
displayed.)
CA00E1FA Building device list for SCSI adapters 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
(The device ID and device LUN of the
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
device being scanned is also displayed.)
assembly.
CA00E1FB Scan SCSI bus for attached devices 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E1FC Building boot device list for SSA 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
adapters. (The location code of the SSA
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
adapter being scanned is also
assembly.
displayed.)
CA00E1FE Building device list for fibre-channel 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
(SAN) adapters. (The WWPN of the SAN
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
adapter being scanned is also
assembly.
displayed.)
CA00E1FF Building device list for fibre-channel 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
(SAN) adapters. (The LUN of the SAN
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
adapter being scanned is also
assembly.
displayed.)
CA00E440 Validate NVRAM, initialize partitions as 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
needed
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E441 Generate /options node NVRAM 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
configuration variable properties
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E442 Validate NVRAM partitions 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E443 Generate NVRAM configuration variable 1. Check for server firmware updates; then,
dictionary words install the updates if available and retry the
operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

30 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E444 The NVRAM size is less than 8K bytes 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E701 Create memory VPD 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E800 Initialize RTAS 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E810 Initializing ioconfig pfds 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E820 Initializing lpevent 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E830 Initializing event scan 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E840 Initializing hot plug 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E843 Initializing interface/aix access 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E850 Initializing dynamic reconfiguration 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E860 Initializing sensors 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E865 Initializing VPD 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E870 Initializing pfds memory manager 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 31
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA00E875 Initializing rtas_last_error 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E876 Initializing rtas_error_inject 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E877 Initializing dump interface 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E879 Initialize platform-assisted KDUMP 1. Reboot the blade server.
interface
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E885 Initializing set-power-level 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E886 Initializing exit2c 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E887 Initialize gdata for activate_firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E890 Starting to initialize open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00E891 Finished initializing open firmware 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA00EAA1 Probe PCI-PCI bridge bus 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA060203 An alias was modified or created 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

32 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the system hangs on a progress code, follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed
in the Action column until the problem is resolved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Progress code Description Action
CA26FFFF An extended waiting time was required 1. Reboot the blade server.
for lpevent to finish
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA26ttss Waiting for lpevent of type tt and subtype 1. Restart the blade server.
ss.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
CA279001 The firmware image contains a firmware 1. Look for a BA27xxxx error in the error logs
module that is not already on the server. to see if a firmware installation error
occurred. Resolve any problems that are
found and retry the firmware installation.
2. Retry the firmware installation with another
firmware image.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
CA2799FD A firmware update module is being read. Shut down the blade server; then, restart it
using the permanent boot image and reject the
temporary image.
CA2799FF A firmware update module is being Shut down the blade server; then, restart it
written. using the permanent boot image and reject the
temporary image.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 33
Attention codes
The following table describes the partitioning firmware attention codes that may be
displayed if POST detects a problem and suggested actions to correct the problem.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Attention code Description Action
AA00E1A8 The system is booting to the open At the open firmware prompt, type dev
firmware prompt. /packages/gui obe and press Enter; then, type
1 to select SMS Menu.
AA00E1A9 The system is booting to the System 1. If the system or partition returns to the SMS
Management Services (SMS) menus. menus after a boot attempt failed, use the
SMS menus to check the progress indicator
history for a BAxx xxxx error, which may
indicate why the boot attempt failed. Follow
the actions for that error code to resolve the
boot problem.
2. Use the SMS menus to establish the boot
list and restart the blade server.
AA00E1B0 Waiting for the user to select the 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
language and keyboard. The menu available.
should be visible on the console.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
AA00E1B1 Waiting for the user to accept or decline 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
the license agreement. The user must available.
accept the license agreement.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
AA060007 A keyboard was not found. Make sure that a keyboard is attached to the
USB port that is assigned to the partition.
AA06000B The system or partition was not able to 1. Use the SMS menus to modify the boot list
find an operating system on any of the so that it includes devices that have a
devices in the boot list. known-good operating system and restart
the blade server.
2. If the problem remains, go to “Boot problem
resolution” on page 112.
AA06000C The media in a device in the boot list 1. Replace the media in the device with
was not bootable. known-good media or modify the boot list to
boot from another bootable device.
2. If the problem remains, go to “Boot problem
resolution” on page 112.

34 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Attention code Description Action
AA06000D The media in the device in the bootlist 1. Make sure that the media from which you
was not found under the I/O adapter are trying to boot is bootable or modify the
specified by the bootlist. boot list to boot from another bootable
device.
2. If the problem remains, go to “Boot problem
resolution” on page 112.
AA06000E The adapter specified in the boot list is v For an AIX operating system:
not present or is not functioning.
1. Try booting the blade server from another
bootable device; then, run AIX online
diagnostics against the failing adapter.
2. If AIX cannot be booted from another
device, boot the blade server using the
Standalone Diagnostics CD or a NIM
server; then, run diagnostics against the
failing adapter.
v For a Linux operating system, boot the blade
server using the Standalone Diagnostics CD
or a NIM server; then, run diagnostics
against the failing adapter.
AA060010 The FAT file system on the boot disk is Increase the FAT partition size by 10% to keep
configured in a way that might cause a the number of data clusters fewer than
boot failure. approximately 4080.
AA060011 The firmware did not find an operating Make sure that:
system image and at least one hard disk v The boot disk belongs to the partition from
in the boot list was not detected by the which you are trying to boot.
firmware. The firmware is retrying the
v The boot list in the SMS menus is correct.
entries in the boot list.
AA100001 There was a communication failure 1. Look at the error logs for errors that
between partition firmware and the occurred around the time that this attention
hypervisor. The event that was expected code was logged. Resolve those errors,
from the hypervisor was not received. then reboot the blade server.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
AA100002 There was a communication failure 1. Look at the error logs for errors that
between partition firmware and the occurred around the time that this attention
hypervisor. code was logged. Resolve those errors,
then reboot the blade server.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
AA130013 Bootable media is missing from a USB Make sure that a bootable CD is properly
CD-ROM inserted in the CD or DVD drive and retry the
boot operation.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 35
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Attention code Description Action
AA130014 The media in a USB CD-ROM has been 1. Retry the operation.
changed.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available and retry the
operation.
AA170210 Setenv/$setenv parameter error - the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
name contains a null character.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
AA170211 Setenv/$setenv parameter error - the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
value contains a null character.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
AA190001 The hypervisor function to get/set the 1. Use the operating system to set the system
time-of-day clock reported an error. clock.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
AA260001 The system is waiting for the machine Enter the machine type, model, and serial
type, model, and serial number to be number of the blade server at the prompt.
entered.
BA00E820 lpevent communication failure 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA00E830 ibm,event-scan init failure 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

36 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Error codes
The following table describes the error codes that may be displayed if POST
detects a problem and suggested actions to correct the problem.

Note: For problems persisting after completing the suggested actions, see
“Checkout procedure” on page 106 and “Solving undetermined problems” on page
135.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
A200yyyy See the description for B200yyyy error Perform the action described in B200yyyy error
code with same yyyy value. code with same yyyy value.
A7003000 A user-initiated platform dump occurred. No service action required.
A700yyyy See the description for B700yyyy error Perform the action in B700yyyy error code with
code with same yyyy value. same yyyy value.
B2001150 During the startup of a partition, a Go to “Verifying the partition configuration” on
partitioning configuration problem page 108.
occurred.
B2001230 During the startup of a partition, a Go to “Verifying the partition configuration” on
partitioning configuration problem page 108.
occurred; the partition is lacking the
necessary resources to start up.
B2001266 The partition could not start up; you are Install a supported operating system and restart
attempting to start up an operating the partition.
system that is not supported.
B2002250 During the startup of a partition, an Check for server firmware updates; then, install
attempt to toggle the power state of a the updates if available.
slot has failed.
B2002300 During the startup of a partition, an Check for server firmware updates; then, install
attempt to toggle the power state of a the updates if available.
slot has failed.
B2002310 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition firmware attempted an operation 127.
that failed.
B2002320 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition firmware attempted an operation 127.
that failed.
B2002425 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition firmware attempted an operation 127.
that failed.
B2002426 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition firmware attempted an operation 127.
that failed.
B2002475 During the startup of a partition, a slot Check for server firmware updates; then, install
that was needed for the partition was the updates if available.
either empty or the device in the slot has
failed.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 37
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B2002485 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition firmware attempted an operation 127.
that failed.
B2003081 During the startup of a partition, the Check for server firmware updates; then, install
startup did not complete due to a copy the updates if available.
error.
B2003125 During the startup of a partition, the Check for server firmware updates; then, install
blade server firmware could not obtain a the updates if available.
segment of main storage within the
blade server to use for managing the
creation of a partition.
B2006006 During the startup of a partition, a Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
system firmware error occurred when the 127.
partition memory was being initialized;
the startup will not continue.
B2006012 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition LID failed to completely load 127.
into the partition main storage area.
B2006027 During the startup of a partition, a failure 1. Make sure that enough main storage was
occurred when allocating memory for an allocated to the partition.
internal object used for firmware module
2. Retry the operation.
load operations.
B200690A During the startup of a partition, an error Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
occurred while copying open firmware 127.
into the partition load area.
B2008080 System log entry only. No service action required.
B2008081 During the startup of a partition, an Check for server firmware updates; then, install
internal firmware time-out occurred; the the updates if available.
partition may continue to start up but it
may experience problems while running.
B2008105 During the startup of a partition, there Check for server firmware updates; then, install
was a failure loading the VPD areas of the updates if available.
the partition; the load source media has
been corrupted or is unsupported on this
server.
B2008107 During the startup of a partition, there Check for server firmware updates; then, install
was a problem getting a segment of the updates if available.
main storage in the blade server main
storage.
B2008109 During the startup of a partition, a failure 1. Make sure that there is enough memory to
occurred; the startup will not continue. start up the partition.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
B2008112 During the startup of a partition, a failure Check for server firmware updates; then, install
occurred; the startup will not continue. the updates if available.

38 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B2008113 During the startup of a partition, an error Check for server firmware updates; then, install
occurred while mapping memory for the the updates if available.
partition startup.
B2008114 During the startup of a partition, there Check for server firmware updates; then, install
was a failure verifying the VPD for the the updates if available.
partition resources during startup.
B2008115 During the startup of a partition, there Check for server firmware updates; then, install
was a low level partition-to-partition the updates if available.
communication failure.
B2008117 During the startup of a partition, the Check for server firmware updates; then, install
partition did not start up due to a system the updates if available.
firmware error.
B2008121 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition did not start up due to a system 127.
firmware error.
B2008123 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition did not start up due to a system 127.
firmware error.
B2008125 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition did not start up due to a system 127.
firmware error.
B2008127 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition did not start up due to a system 127.
firmware error.
B2008129 During the startup of a partition, the Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
partition did not start up due to a system 127.
firmware error.
B200A100 A partition ended abnormally; the 1. Check the error logs and take the actions
B200A101 partition could not stay running and shut for the error codes that are found.
itself down.
2. Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
127.
B200B07B System log entry only. No service action required.
B200C1F0 An internal system firmware error Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
occurred during a partition shutdown or a 127.
restart.
B200D150 A partition ended abnormally; there was Check for server firmware updates; then, install
a communications problem between this the updates if available.
partition and the code that handles
resource allocation.
B200F003 During the startup of a partition, the Collect the partition dump information; then, go
partition processor(s) did not start the to “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
firmware within the time-out window.
B200F004 A partition had a communications Collect the partition dump information; then, go
B200F005 problem during a shutdown of the to “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
partition.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 39
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B200F006 During the startup of a partition, the code 1. Check the error logs and take the actions
load operation for the partition startup for the error codes that are found.
timed out.
2. Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
127.
B200F007 During a shutdown of the partition, a Check for server firmware updates; then, install
time-out occurred while trying to stop a the updates if available.
partition
B400BAD0 No DIMMs detected 1. Reseat the DIMMs and restart the blade
00000000 server.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
B400BAD0 DIMM failure where: 1. Reseat the DIMMs and restart the blade
0000XXYY v XX is: server.
01=DIMM4 missing; 02=DIMM2 2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
unsupported and DIMM4 missing; 3. Replace the system-board and chassis
04=DIMM2 failed and DIMM4 missing; assembly.
10=DIMM2 missing; 12=DIMM2
unsupported; 14=DIMM2 failed;
20=DIMM2 missing and DIMM4
unsupported; 21=DIMM4 unsupported;
22=DIMM2 and DIMM4 unsupported;
24=DIMM2 failed and DIMM4
unsupported; 40=DIMM2 missing and
DIMM4 failed; 41=DIMM4 failed;
42=DIMM2 unsupported and DIMM4
failed; 44=DIMM2 and DIMM4 failed;
88=DIMM2 and DIMM4 mismatch
v YY is:
01=DIMM3 missing; 02=DIMM1
unsupported and DIMM3 missing;
04=DIMM1 failed and DIMM3 missing;
10=DIMM1 missing; 12=DIMM1
unsupported; 14=DIMM1 failed;
20=DIMM1 missing and DIMM3
unsupported; 21=DIMM3 unsupported;
22=DIMM1 and DIMM3 unsupported;
24=DIMM1 failed and DIMM3
unsupported; 40=DIMM1 missing and
DIMM3 failed; 41=DIMM3 failed;
42=DIMM1 unsupported and DIMM3
failed; 44=DIMM1 and DIMM3 failed;
88=DIMM1 and DIMM3 mismatch)

40 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B400BAD1 TEMP side firmware image corruption 1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware” on
83A00702 (x) was detected (blade server will page 127.
automatically restart using the PERM
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
side image after 4 minutes).
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
B400BAD1 PHYPL LID XXXXXXXX exceeds its 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
XXXXXXXX (>) maximum size.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
where XXXXXXXX is: 83A00702, assembly.
80A00701, or 80A00711
B400BAD1 PHYPL LID XXXXXXXX is not found. 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
XXXXXXXX (-)
where XXXXXXXX is: 83A00702, 2. Replace the system-board and chassis
80A00701, or 80A00711 assembly.

B400BAD1 PHYPL LID XXXXXXXX CRC 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.

XXXXXXXX (x) mismatches.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
where XXXXXXXX is: 80A00701 or assembly.
80A00711
B400BADC Processor x is faulty Replace the system-board and chassis
2B200X31 assembly.
B400BADD Memory DIMM is not supported 1. Make sure that:
25C10002
v All DIMMs are supported; replace all
unsupported DIMMs and restart the blade
server
v All DIMMs are installed in pairs; install
DIMMs properly and restart the blade
server.
2. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the
blade server each time:
a. Each DIMM, until the failing DIMM is
isolated
b. System-board and chassis assembly.
B400BADD Memory DIMM error 1. Reseat the DIMMs and restart the blade
25C10001 server.
2. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the
blade server each time:
a. DIMM specified by the location code
b. Companion DIMM of the DIMM
specified by the location code
c. System-board and chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 41
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B400BADD Companion (in the pair) of the memory 1. Reseat all DIMMs and restart the blade
25C10003 DIMM specified by the location code is server.
unmatched
2. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the
blade server each time:
a. DIMM specified by the location code
b. Companion DIMM of the DIMM
specified by the location code
c. System-board and chassis assembly.
B400BADD Companion (in the pair) of the memory 1. Reseat all DIMMs and restart the blade
25C10004 DIMM specified by the location code is server.
missing, failing, or unsupported
2. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the
blade server each time:
a. DIMM specified by the location code
b. Companion DIMM of the DIMM
specified by the location code
c. System-board and chassis assembly.
B7000102 System firmware detected an error. A Collect the error log information; then, go to
machine check occurred during startup. “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
B7000103 System firmware detected a failure Collect the error log and platform dump
information; then, go to “Firmware problem
isolation” on page 127.
B7000104 System firmware failure. Machine check, Check for server firmware updates; then, install
undefined error occurred. the updates if available.
B7000105 System firmware detected an error. More Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
than one request to terminate the system 127.
was issued.
B7000106 System firmware failure. Collect the error log and platform dump
information; then, go to “Firmware problem
isolation” on page 127.
B7000107 System firmware failure. The system Collect the error log and platform dump
detected an unrecoverable machine information; then, go to “Firmware problem
check condition. isolation” on page 127.
B70001F5 A processor failure has occurred. Replace the blade server.
B70001F6 A memory failure has occurred Replace the DIMM specified by the location
code that is reported with the error code.
B7000302 System firmware failure Collect the platform dump information; then, go
to “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
B7000441 Service processor failure. The platform Replace the blade server.
encountered an error early in the startup
or termination process.
B7000443 Service processor failure. Replace the blade server.

42 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B7000601 Informational system log entry. No corrective action is required.
Note: This code and associated data can be
used to determine why the time of day for a
partition was lost.
B7000602 System firmware detected an error Collect the error log information; then, go to
condition. “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
B7000611 There is a problem with the system Use the operating system to set the system
hardware clock; the clock time is invalid. clock.
B7000621 Informational system log entry only. No corrective action is required.
B7000631 The hardware real-time clock has Replace the system battery.
detected that the battery is low.
B7000650 System firmware detected an error. Collect the error log, platform dump, and
Resource management was unable to partition configuration information; then, go to
allocate main storage. A platform dump “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
was initiated.
B7004400 There is a platform dump to collect Use the method provided by your operating
system to collect the platform dump information;
then, go to “Firmware problem isolation” on
page 127.
B7004401 System firmware failure. The system Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
firmware detected an internal problem. 127.
B7004407 Informational only: system firmware has No corrective action is required.
deleted a platform dump.
B7004408 A platform dump has occurred. (The Collect the platform dump information; then, go
system issues this error code during the to “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
first startup after a dump is requested.)
B7004409 A platform dump has occurred. A Collect the platform dump information; then, go
previous attempt to startup failed; the to “Firmware problem isolation” on page 127.
dump from the previous B7004408 error
code has been lost.
B7005190 Operating system error. The server Check for error codes in the partition that is
firmware detected a problem in an reporting the error and take the appropriate
operating system. actions for those error codes.
B7005191 System firmware detected a virtual I/O 1. Use the partition manager to verify or
configuration error. reconfigure the invalid virtual I/O
configuration.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
B7005300 System firmware detected a failure while Check the management module event log and
partitioning resources. The platform the SMS progress indicator history for error
partitioning code encountered an error. codes; then, take the actions associated with
those error codes.
B7005301 User intervention required. The system Use the partition manager to reallocate the
detected a problem with the partition system resources.
configuration.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 43
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
B7005401 The system encountered a correctable Replace the DIMM specified by the location
memory failure. code that is reported with the error code.
B7005402 through A correctable processor failure occurred. Replace the blade server.
B7005406
B7005601 System firmware failure. There was a Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
problem initializing, reading, or using 127.
system location codes.
B7005700 The system firmware has experienced a At your earliest convenience, use the method
low storage condition. provided by your operating system to force a
platform dump; then, go to “Firmware problem
isolation” on page 127.
B7006951 An error occurred because a partition Use the partition manager to delete one or
needed more NVRAM than was more partitions.
available.
B700BAD1 The platform firmware detected an error. Go to “Firmware problem isolation” on page
127.
B700F103 System firmware failure Collect the error log and platform dump
information; then, go to “Firmware problem
isolation” on page 127.
B700F104 Operating system error. System firmware Check the management module event log and
terminated a partition. the SMS progress indicator history for partition
firmware error codes (especially BA00F104);
then, take the appropriate actions for those
error codes.
B700F105 System firmware detected an internal Collect the error log and platform dump
error information; then, go to “Firmware problem
isolation” on page 127.
BA000010 The device data structure is corrupted 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000020 The firmware levels are incompatible. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA000031 lpevent communication failure 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

44 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA000030 An lpevent communication failure 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
occurred
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000032 The firmware failed to register the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
lpevent queues
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000034 The firmware failed to exchange capacity 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
and allocate lpevents
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000038 The firmware failed to exchange virtual 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
continuation lpevents
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000040 The firmware was unable to obtain the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
RTAS code lid details
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000050 The firmware was unable to load the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
RTAS code lid
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000060 The firmware was unable to obtain the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
open firmware code lid details
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000070 The firmware was unable to load the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
open firmware code lid
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA000080 The user did not accept the firmware 1. Reboot the blade server.
license agreement.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA000081 Failed to get the firmware license policy. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 45
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA000082 Failed to set the firmware license policy. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA000091 Unable to load the second-pass C code 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA00E840 PCI hot-plug init failure 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA00E843 Initialization of the rtas-call interface 1. Reboot the blade server.
failed.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA00E850 There was a failure when initializing 1. Reboot the blade server.
dynamic reconfiguration.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA00E860 There was a failure when initializing the 1. Reboot the blade server.
sensors.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA010000 There is insufficient information to boot 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
the systems
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA010001 The client IP address is already in use Make sure that all of the IP addresses on the
by another network device network are unique; then, retry the operation.

46 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA010002 Cannot get gateway IP address Perform the actions for progress code
CA00E174 (see “Progress codes” on page 10).
BA010003 Cannot get server hardware address Perform the actions for progress code
CA00E174 (see “Progress codes” on page 10
BA010004 Bootp failed Perform the actions for progress code
CA00E174 (see “Progress codes” on page 10
BA010005 File transmission (TFTP) failed Perform the actions for progress code
CA00E174 (see “Progress codes” on page 10
BA010006 The boot image is too large Start up from another device with a bootable
image.
BA010010 There was a partition firmware error 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
while in the SMS menus available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA010011 SET-ROOT-PROP could not find / (root) 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
package available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA012010 Opening the TCP node failed. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA012011 TCP failed to read from the network. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA012012 TCP failed to write to the network. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA012013 Closing TCP failed. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA017020 Failed to open the TFTP package Verify that the TFTP parameters are correct.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 47
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA017021 Failed to load the TFTP file Verify that the TFTP server and network
connections are correct.
BA01B010 Opening the BOOTP node failed. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA01B011 BOOTP failed to read from the network Refer to the actions for checkpoint CA00E174.
BA01B012 BOOTP failed to write to the network Refer to the actions for checkpoint CA00E174.
BA01B013 The discover mode is invalid 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA01B014 Closing the BOOTP node failed 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA01B015 The BOOTP discover server timed out. Refer to the actions for checkpoint CA00E174.
BA01D001 Opening the DHCP node failed 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA01D020 DHCP failed to read from the network 1. Verify that the network cable is connected,
and that the network is active.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA01D030 DHCP failed to write to the network 1. Verify that the network cable is connected,
and that the network is active.
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

48 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA01D040 The DHCP discover server timed out 1. Insure that the DHCP server has addresses
available.
2. Insure that the DHCP server's configuration
file is not overly constrained such that it
was not able to meet the configuration
requested by the client.
3. Refer to the actions for checkpoint
CA00E174.
BA01D050 DHCP::discover no good offer DHCP discover did not receive any DHCP
offers from the server(s) the meet the clients's
requirements. Insure that the DHCP server's
configuration file is not overly constrained such
that it was not able to meet the configuration
requested by the client.
BA01D051 DHCP::discover DHCP request timed out 1. DHCP discover did receive a DHCP offer
from the server(s) the meet the clients's
requirements, but the server did not send
DHCP ack (the acknowledgement) to the
client's DHCP request. It is possible that
another client was using the address that
was served.
2. Insure that the DHCP server has addresses
available.
BA01D052 DHCP::discover: 10 incabable servers Ten DHCP servers have sent DHCP offers,
were found none of which met the requirements on the
client. Check the configuration that the client is
requesting, and the server's DHCP
configuration files, for compatibility.
BA01D053 DHCP::discover received a reply, but Insure that the DHCP server is properly
without a message type configured.
BA01D054 DHCP::discover: DHCP nak received 1. DHCP discover did receive a DHCP offer
from the server(s) the meet the clients's
requirements, but the server did sent DHCP
nak (not acknowledged) to the client's
DHCP request. (It is possible that another
client was using the address that was
served.) This usually occurs when there are
multiple DHCP servers on the same
network, and server A does not know the
subnet configuration of server B, and
vice-versa. This can also occur when the
pool of addresses is not truly divided.
The DHCP server's configuration file should
also be set to "authoritative".
2. Insure that the DHCP server is functioning
properly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 49
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA01D055 DHCP::discover: DHCP decline 1. DHCP discover did receive a DHCP offer
from the server(s) the meet the clients's
requirements, but the client performed an
ARP test on the address and found that
another client was using the address.
DHCP decline was sent to the server, but
no additional DHCP offers were received by
the client. The client still does not have a
valid address.
2. Insure that the DHCP server is functioning
properly.
BA01D056 DHCP::discover: unknown DHCP DHCP discover received an unknown DHCP
message message type. Insure that the DHCP server is
functioning properly.
BA01D0FF Closing the DHCP node failed. 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA04000F Self test failed on device; no error or 1. If a location code is displayed with the error,
location code information available replace the device specified by the location
code.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA040010 Self test failed on device; can't locate 1. If a location code is displayed with the error,
package replace the device specified by the location
code.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA040020 The machine type and model are not 1. Check for server firmware updates; then,
recognized by the blade server firwmare install the updates if available.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA040030 The firmware was not able to build the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
UID properly for this system. As a result,
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
problems may occur with the licensing of
assembly.
the AIX operating system
BA040035 The firmware was unable to find the Make sure that the machine type, model, and
“plant of manufacture” in the VPD. This serial number are correct for this server. If this
may cause problems with the licensing is a new server, check for server firmware
of the AIX operating system. updates; then, install the updates if available.

50 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA040040 Setting the machine type, model, and 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
serial number failed.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA040050 The h-call to switch off the boot 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
watchdog timer failed.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA040060 Setting the firmware boot side for the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
next boot failed.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA050001 Failed to reboot a partition in logical 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
partition mode
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA050004 Failed to locate service processor device 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
tree node.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA05000A Failed to send boot failed message 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060003 IP parameter requires 3 period Enter a valid IP parameter using the format:
characters “.” XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where X is any digit 0 -
255.
BA060004 Invalid IP parameter Enter a valid IP parameter using the format:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where X is any digit 0 -
255.
BA060005 Invalid IP parameter (>255) Enter a valid IP parameter using the format:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where X is any digit 0 -
255.
BA060008 No configurable adapters found by the This error occurs when the firmware cannot
Remote IPL menu in the SMS utilities locate any LAN adapters that are supported by
the remote IPL function. Make sure that the
devices in the remote IPL device list are correct
using the SMS menus.
BA06000B The system was not able to find an Go to “Boot problem resolution” on page 112.
operating system on the devices in the
boot list.
BA06000C A pointer to the operating system was 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
found in non-volatile storage.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060020 The environment variable “boot-device” 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
exceeded the allowed character limit.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 51
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA060021 The environment variable “boot-device” 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
contained more than five entries.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060022 The environment variable “boot-device” 1. Using the SMS menus, set the boot list to
contained an entry that exceeded 255 the default boot list. Shut down; then, start
characters in length up the blade server. Use SMS menus to
customize the boot list as required.
2. If the problem remains, go to “Checkout
procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060030 Logical partitioning with shared 1. Install or boot a level of the operating
processors is enabled and the operating system that supports shared processors.
system does not support it.
2. Disable logical partitioning with shared
processors in the operating system.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060040 The partition is configured with large Boot a version of the operating system that
pages but the operating system does not supports large pages.
support large pages.
BA060060 The operating system expects an IOSP 1. Make sure that
partition, but it failed to make the
v The alpha-mode operating system image
transition to alpha mode.
is intended for this partition.
v The configuration of the partition supports
an alpha-mode operating system.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060061 The operating system expects a 1. Make sure that
non-IOSP partition, but it failed to make
v The non-alpha-mode operating system
the transition to MGC mode.
image is intended for this partition.
v The configuration of the partition supports
a non-alpha-mode operating system.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA060070 The operating system does not support Boot a version of the operating system that
the server's processors. supports the server's processors.
BA060071 An invalid number of vectors was Boot a newer version of the operating system
received from the operating system

52 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA060072 client-arch-support software error 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA060075 client-arch-support firmware error 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA060200 Failed to set the operating system's boot 1. Verify that the boot list is set up in the MM.
list from the management module boot
2. Check for server firmware and MM firmware
list.
updates; apply if available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA060201 Failed to read the "boot path" value in 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
the VPD available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA060202 Failed to read the "boot path" value in 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
the VPD with the new value. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA07xxxx SCSI controller failure 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA090001 SCSI DASD: test unit ready failed; 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
hardware error
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA090002 SCSI DASD: test unit ready failed; sense 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
data available
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA090003 SCSI DASD: send diagnostic failed; 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
sense data available
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 53
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA090004 SCSI DASD: send diagnostic failed: 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
devofl cmd
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000A There was a vendor specification error. 1. Check the vendor specification for additional
information.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000B Generic SCSI sense error 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000C The media is write-protected 1. Change the setting of the media to allow
writing, then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000D The media is unsupported or not 1. Insert new media of the correct type, then
recognized. retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000E The media is not formatted correctly. 1. Insert new media with the correct format,
then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA09000F Media is not present 1. Insert new media, then retry the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA090010 The request sense command failed. 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

54 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA090011 The retry limit has been exceeded. 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
properly
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA090012 There is a SCSI device that is not 1. Replace the SCSI device that is not
supported. supported with supported device.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA120001 On an undetermined SCSI device, test 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
unit ready failed; hardware error
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA120002 On an undetermined SCSI device, test 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
unit ready failed; sense data available
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA120003 On an undetermined SCSI device, send 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
diagnostic failed; sense data available
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA120004 On an undetermined SCSI device, send 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
diagnostic failed; devofl command
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA120010 Failed to generate the SAS device's 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
physical location code. The error log available.
entry has the details.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA130001 SCSI CD-ROM test unit ready failed; 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
hardware error. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA130002 SCSI CD-ROM test unit ready failed; 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
sense data available. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 55
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA130003 SCSI CD-ROM send diagnostic failed; 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
sense data available. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA130004 SCSI CD-ROM send diagnostic failed: 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
devofl command. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA130010 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: device 1. Retry the operation.
remained busy longer than the time-out
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
period
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA130011 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: 1. Retry the operation.
execution of ATA/ATAPI command was
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
not completed with the allowed time.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA130012 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: 1. Remove the CD or DVD in the drive and
execution of ATA/ATAPI command failed. replace it with a known-good disk.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the USB CD or DVD drive.
4. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA130013 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: 1. Insert a bootable CD in the drive and retry
bootable media is missing from the drive the operation.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the USB CD or DVD drive.
4. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA130014 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: the 1. Retry the operation.
media in the USB CD-ROM drive has
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
been changed.
3. Replace the USB CD or DVD drive.
4. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

56 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA130015 USB CD-ROM in the media tray: 1. Retry the operation.
ATA/ATAPI packet command execution
2. Remove the CD or DVD in the drive and
failed.
replace it with a known-good disk.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the USB CD or DVD drive.
5. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA131010 The USB keyboard has been removed. 1. Reseat the keyboard cable in the
management module USB port.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
BA140001 The SCSI read/write optical test unit 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
ready failed; hardware error. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA140002 The SCSI read/write optical test unit 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
ready failed; sense data available. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA140003 The SCSI read/write optical send 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
diagnostic failed; sense data available. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA140004 The SCSI read/write optical send 1. Verify that the SCSI cables and devices are
diagnostic failed; devofl command. properly plugged; correct any problems that
are found.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA150001 PCI Ethernet BNC/RJ-45 or PCI Ethernet Replace the adapter specified by the location
AUI/RJ-45 adapter: internal wrap test code.
failure

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 57
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA150070 The receive operation failed. 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA151001 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI adapter: Replace the adapter specified by the location
internal wrap test failure code.
BA151002 10/100 Mbps Ethernet card failure 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA153002 Gigabit Ethernet adapter failure Make sure that the MAC address programmed
in the FLASH/EEPROM is correct.
BA153003 Gigabit Ethernet adapter failure 1. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
2. Replace the Gigabit Ethernet adapter.
BA154010 HEA software error 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA154020 The required open firmware property 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
was not found. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA154030 Invalid parameters were passed to the 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
HEA device driver. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA154040 The TFTP package open failed 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA154050 The transmit operation failed. 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

58 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA154060 Failed to initialize the HEA port or queue 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA170000 NVRAMRC initialization failed; device 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
test failed
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA170100 NVRAM data validation check failed 1. Shut down the blade server; then, restart it.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA170201 The firmware was unable to expand 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
target partition - saving configuration
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
variable
assembly.
BA170202 The firmware was unable to expand 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
target partition - writing error log entry
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA170203 The firmware was unable to expand 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
target partition - writing VPD data
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA170210 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - name 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
contains a null character
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA170211 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - value 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
contains a null character
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

BA170220 Unable to write a variable value to 1. Reduce the number of partitions, if possible,
NVRAM due to lack of free memory in to add more memory in NVRAM to this
NVRAM. partition.
2. Go to the checkout procedure on page xx.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA170221 Setenv/$setenv had to delete stored The user may need to reenter adapter and
firmware network boot settings to free network parameters for network boot or
memory in NVRAM. installation.
BA170998 NVRAMRC script evaluation error - 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
command line execution error.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 59
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA180014 MSI software error. 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA180020 No response was received from a slot 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
during PCI probing. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA180099 PCI probe error; bridge in freeze state, 1. Check for adapter firmware updates; apply
slot in reset state if available.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA180100 The FDDI adapter Fcode driver is not
supported on this server. IBM may
produce a compatible driver in the future,
but does not guarantee one.
BA188000 There is an unsupported adapter in the Remove the adapter.
PCI slot
BA188001 EEH recoved a failing I/O adapter Replace the adapter.
BA188002 EEH was not able to recover the failing Replace the adapter.
I/O apdater.
BA180008 PCI device Fcode evaluation error 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA180009 The Fcode on a PCI adapter left a data 1. Check for adapter firmware updates; then,
stack imbalance install the updates if available.
2. Check for server firmware updates; then,
install the updates if available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA180010 PCI probe error, bridge in freeze state 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA180011 PCI bridge probe error, bridge is not 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
usable
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

60 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA180012 PCI device runtime error, bridge in 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
freeze state
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA180101 Stack underflow from fibre-channel 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
adapter
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA190001 Firmware function to get/set time-of-day 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
reported an error
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA201001 The serial interface dropped data 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
packets
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA201002 The serial interface failed to open 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA201003 The firmware failed to handshake 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
properly with the serial interface
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210000 Partition firmware reports a default catch 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210001 Partition firmware reports a stack 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
underflow was caught
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210002 Partition firmware was ready before 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
standout was ready
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210003 A data storage error was caught by 1. If the location code reported with the error
partition firmware points to an adapter, check for adapter
firmware updates; apply if available.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA210013 There was a partition firmware error 1. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
while in the SMS menus available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 61
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA210020 I/O configuration exceeded the maximum 1. Increase the logical memory block size to
size allowed by partition firmware. 256 MB and restart the blade server.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210100 An error may not have been sent to the 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
management module event log.
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA210101 The partition firmware error log queue is 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
full
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
.BA220010 There was a partition firmware error 1. Check the error logs for EEH-related
during USB hotpug probing. USB hotplug entries; resolve any entries that are found,
may not work correctly on this partition. then reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA220010 There was a partition firmware error 1. Check the error logs for EEH-related
during USB hotpug probing. USB hotplug entries; resolve any entries that are found,
may not work correctly on this partition. then reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA220020 There was a CRQ registration error; the Verify that this client virtual slot device has a
partner vslot is not valid. valid server virtual slot device in a hosting
partition.
BA278001 Failed to flash firmware: invalid image Download a new firmware update image and
file retry the update.
BA278002 Flash file is not designed for this Download a new firmware update image and
platform retry the update.
BA278003 Unable to lock the firmware update lid 1. Restart the blade server.
manager
2. Make sure that the operating system is
authorized to update the firmware. If the
system is running multiple partitions, make
sure that this partition has service authority.
BA278004 An invalid firmware update lid was Download a new firmware update image and
requested retry the update.

62 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA278005 Failed to flash a firmware update lid Download a new firmware update image and
retry the update.
BA278006 Unable to unlock the firmware update lid Restart the blade server.
manager
BA278007 Failed to reboot the system after a Restart the blade server.
firmware flash update
BA278009 The operating system tools to update the Go to the IBM microcode download web site
blade server firmware are incompatible (http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/server/
with this system. lopdiags) and download the latest version of the
service aids package for Linux.
BA27800A A server firmware update failed due to a 1. Check the error logs for hardware-related
hardware error. entries; resolve any entries that are found,
then reboot the blade server and retry the
server firmware update.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
4.
BA280000 RTAS discovered an invalid operation 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
that may cause a hardware error
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA290000 RTAS discovered an internal stack 1. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
overflow
2. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
BA290001 RTAS low memory corruption was 1. Reboot the blade server.
detected
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA290002 RTAS low memory corruption was 1. Reboot the blade server.
detected
2. Look for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA310010 Unable to obtain the SRC history 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 63
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA310020 An invalid SRC history was obtained. 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA310030 Writing the MAC address to the VPD 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
failed. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA330000 Memory allocation error. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA330001 Memory allocation error. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA330002 Memory allocation error. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA330003 Memory allocation error. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA330004 Memory allocation error. 1. Reboot the blade server.
2. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
available.
3. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.

64 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
BA400001 Informational message: DMA trace buffer 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
full. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
BA400002 Informational message: DMA map-out 1. Check for server firmware updates; apply if
size mismatch. available.
2. Go to “Checkout procedure” on page 106.
3. Replace the system board and chassis
assembly.
4.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 65
Location codes
Location codes are displayed with some error codes to identify the component that
caused the error.

Note: Location codes do not indicate the location of the blade server within the
BladeCenter unit, they only identify components of the blade server.

Location code Component

Um-E1 Battery
Um-P1-C1 DIMM 1
Um-P1-C2 DIMM 2
Um-P1-C3 DIMM 3
Um-P1-C4 DIMM 4
Um-P1-C5 I/O expansion adapter
Um-P1 System-board and chassis assembly
Um-P1-T1
Um-P1-T2
Um-P1-T3
Um-P1-T4
Um-P1-T5
Um-P1-T6
Um-P1-T7
Um-P1-T8
Um-P1-T9
Um-P1-T10
Um-P1-T11
Um-P1-T12
Um-P1-T10-L0-L0 SAS hard disk drive 1
Um-P1-T11-L0-L0 SAS hard disk drive 2
Un-Y1 Firmware version
Um = Uffff.001.sssssss (where: ffff = Um is for enclosure locations
Enclosure feature code, sssssss = serial Un is for system VPD and Firmware
number)
Un = Utttt.mmm.sssssss (where: tttt =
machine type, mmm = model number,
sssssss = serial number)

Error logs
Any errors that are detected by the POST are sent to the BladeCenter management
module event log (see the BladeCenter Management Module User’s Guide for
information about the event log). Depending on your operating system and the
utilities you have installed, error messages might also be stored in an operating
system log (see the documentation that comes with the operating system for more
information).

66 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Service request numbers
Service request numbers (SRNs) are error codes that contain a hyphen. The codes
have three digits before the hyphen, and three or four digits after the hyphen. SRNs
can be viewed using the AIX diagnostics or the Linux service aid “diagela” (if it is
installed).

Note: The “diagela” service aid is part of the Linux service aids for hardware
diagnostics. The service aids are separate from the operating system and are
available for download from the following Web site: http://
techsupport.services.ibm.com/server/lopdiags.

Using the SRN tables

The SRN list is in numerical sequence. The failing function codes (FFCs) are
provided to aid in locating a failing component (see “Failing function codes” on page
104).
Notes:
1. If the SRN does not appear in the table, see “Solving undetermined problems”
on page 135.
2. After replacing a component, verify the replacement part and perform a
log-repair action using the AIX diagnostics.

SRN tables
This section lists SRNs 101-711 through 2D02 (AIX) and A00-(x)xxx through
A1D-50x.

SRNs 101-711 through 2D02

Replace the parts in the order that the FFCs are listed.

Note: An x in the following SRNs represents any digit or character.

SRN FFC Description and action

101-711 to xxx The system hung while trying to configure an unknown resource. Action: Run the
101-726 standalone diagnostics problem determination procedure. If the problem remains,
refer to “Failing function codes” on page 104 to find the FFC that matches the last
three digits of the SRN. Suspect the device adapter or device itself.
Note: xxx corresponds to the last three digits of the SRN.
101-888 210 The system does not IPL. Action: System checkout or undetermined problem
227 procedure.
101-2020 The system hung while trying to configure the Infiniband Communication Manager.
This problem may be attributed to software. Report this problem to the AIX Support
Center.
101-2021 The system hung while trying to configure the Infiniband TCP/IP Interface. This
problem may be attributed to software. Report this problem to the AIX Support
Center.
101-xxxx xxxx The system hung while configuring a resource. The last three or four digits after the
dash (-) identify the failing function code for the resource being configured. Go to
undetermined problem procedure.
103-151 151 The time-of-day battery failed. Action: go to battery replacement procedure
109-200 The system crashed while being run by the customer. Action: Use general checkout
procedure, problem determination procedure and get a new SRN.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 67
 SRN FFC Description and action
110-101 The diagnostics did not detect an installed resource. Action: If this SRN appeared
when running concurrent diagnostics, then run concurrent diagnostics using the diag
-a command.
110-921 to 812 The system halted while diagnostics were executing.
110-926 xxx Note: xxx corresponds to the last three digits of the SRN. Action: Go to general
checkout or problem resolution.
110-935 812 The system halted while diagnostics were executing. Action: Use the problem
determination procedure.
110-xxxx xxxx The system halted while diagnostics were executing.
221 Note: xxxx corresponds to the last three or four digits of the SRN following the dash
(-). If your 110 SRN is not listed, substitute the last three or four digits of the SRN for
xxxx, then proceed to the FFC table using the substituted digits as your FFC. Action:
Run standalone diagnostics, problem determination procedure for AIX and Linux. If
you still get the same SRN, refer to “Failing function codes” on page 104 to find the
FFC that matches the last three digits of the SRN.
111-107 A machine check occurred. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
page 106.
111-108 An encoded SRN was displayed. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
111-121 There is a display problem. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
page 106.
111-78C 227 PCI adapter I/O bus problem. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
page 106. Perform “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.
111-999 210 System does not perform a soft reset. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
252B-101 252B Adapter configuration error.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-710 252B Permanent adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-711 252B Adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-712 252B Adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

68 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
252B-713 252B Adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-714 252B Temporary adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-715 252B Temporary adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-716 252B PCI bus error detected by EEH.
293 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-717 252B PCI bus error detected by adapter.
293 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-718 252B Temporary PCI bus error detected by adapter.
293 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-719 252B Device bus termination power lost or not detected.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-720 252B Adapter detected device bus failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 69
 SRN FFC Description and action
252B-721 252B Temporary adapter detected device bus failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-722 252B Device bus interface problem.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
252B-723 252B Device bus interface problem.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-201 256D Adapter configuration error.
221 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-601 256D Error log analysis indicates adapter.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-602 256D Error log analysis indicates an error attention condition.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-603 256D Error Log Analysis indicates that the microcode could not be loaded on the adapter.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-604 256D Error Log Analysis indicates a permanent adapter failure.
210 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

70 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
256D-605 256D Error Log Analysis indicates permanent adapter failure is reported on the other port of
this adapter.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-606 256D Error Log Analysis indicates adapter failure.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-701 256D Error Log Analysis indicates permanent adapter failure.
221 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
256D-702 256D Error Log Analysis indicates permanent adapter failure is reported on the other port of
221 this adapter.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
650-xxx 650 Disk drive configuration failed.
651-xxx The CEC reported a non-critical error. Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Refer
to the problem determination procedure for this system, with the 8-digit error and
location codes, for the necessary repair action. If the 8-digit error and location codes
were NOT reported, then run AIX diagnostics in problem determination procedure and
record and report the 8-digit error and location codes for this SRN.
651-140 221 Display Character test failed.
Note: Diagnostic will provide this SRN but there is no action to be taken. Do not
perform operator panel test from diagnostics.
651-150 166 2E0 Sensor indicates a fan has failed. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
651-151 152 2E2 Sensor indicates a voltage is outside the normal range. Go to “Performing the
checkout procedure” on page 106.
651-152 2E1 Sensor indicates an abnormally high internal temperature. Action: Make sure that:
1. The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment.
2. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
3. All system covers are closed.
651-153 152 Sensor indicates a power supply has failed. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
E19 procedure” on page 106.
651-159 210 Sensor indicates a FRU has failed. Action: use the failing function codes, use the
physical location code(s) from the diagnostic problem report screen to determine the
FRUs.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 71
 SRN FFC Description and action
651-161 2E2 Sensor indicates a voltage is outside the normal range. Action: Go to “Performing the
checkout procedure” on page 106.
651-162 2E1 Sensor indicates an abnormally high internal temperature. Action: Make sure that:
1. The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment.
2. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
3. There are no fan or blower failures in the BladeCenter unit.

If the problem remains, check the management module event log for possible causes
of overheating.
651-163 E19 Sensor indicates a power supply has failed. Action: Contact your support person.
651-169 Sensor indicates a FRU has failed. Action: Contact your support person.
651-170 Sensor status not available. Action: Contact your support person.
651-171 Sensor status not available Action: Contact your support person.
651-600 Uncorrectable memory or unsupported memory. Action: Examine the memory
modules and determine if they are supported types. If the modules are supported,
then replace the appropriate memory modules.
651-601 Missing or bad memory. Action: If the installed memory matches the reported memory
size, then replace the memory; otherwise, add the missing memory.
651-602 2C7 Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-603 2C6 Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
2C7 106.
651-605 2C6 Memory module has no matched pair. Action: The most probable failure is the
memory module paired with the memory module identified by the location code.
651-608 D01 Bad L2 cache.
651-609 D01 Missing L2 cache.
651-610 210 CPU internal error.
651-611 210 CPU internal cache controller error.
651-612 D01 External cache ECC single-bit error.
651-613 D01 External cache ECC single-bit error.
651-614 214 System bus time-out error.
651-615 292 Time-out error waiting for I/O.
651-619 Error log analysis indicates an error detected by the CPU. Action: Use failing function
codes and the physical location codes from the diagnostic problem report screen to
determine the FRUs.
651-621 2C6 ECC correctable error Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-623 2C6 Correctable error threshold exceeded Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-624 214 Memory control subsystem internal error.
651-625 214 Memory address error (invalid address or access attempt).
651-626 214 Memory data error (bad data going to memory).
651-627 214 System bus time-out error.
651-628 210 System bus protocol/transfer error.
651-629 210 Error log analysis indicates an error detected by the memory controller. Action: Go to
“Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.

72 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
651-632 308 Internal device error.
651-639 210 Error log analysis indicates an error detected by the I/O. Action: Use the problem
determination procedure and failing function codes, use the physical location codes
from the diagnostic problem report screen to determine the FRUs.
651-640 2D5 I/O general bus error.
651-641 2D6 Secondary I/O general bus error.
651-642 2D3 Internal service processor memory error.
651-643 2D3 Internal service processor firmware error.
651-644 2D3 Other internal service processor hardware error.
651-659 2CD ECC correctable error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-65A 2CE ECC correctable error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-65B 2CC ECC correctable error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-664 302 Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-665 303 Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-666 304 Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-669 2CD Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-66A 2CE Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-66B 2CC Correctable error threshold exceeded. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-674 302 Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-675 303 Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-676 304 Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-679 2CD Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-67A 2CE Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-67B 2CC Failed memory module. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
651-685 303 Memory module has no matched pair. Action: The most probable failure is the
memory module paired with the memory module identified by the location code. Go to
“Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
651-686 304 Memory module has no matched pair. Action: The most probable failure is the
memory module paired with the memory module identified by the location code. Go to
“Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
651-710 214 System bus parity error.
2C4

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 73
 SRN FFC Description and action
651-711 210 System bus parity error.
2C4
651-712 214 System bus parity error.
651-713 214 System bus protocol/transfer error.
651-714 2C4 System bus protocol/transfer error.
651-715 2C4 System bus protocol/transfer error.
651-720 2C7 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-721 2C6 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
2C7 page 106.
214
651-722 2C4 System bus parity error.
651-723 2C4 System bus protocol/transfer error.
651-724 292 I/O host bridge time-out error.
651-725 292 I/O host bridge address/data parity error.
651-726 Software I/O host bridge timeout caused by software. Action: This error is caused by a
software or operating system attempt to access an invalid memory address. Contact
software support for assistance.
651-731 2C8 Intermediate or system bus address parity error.
651-732 2C8 Intermediate or system bus data parity error.
651-733 2C8 Intermediate or system bus address parity error.
651-734 292 Intermediate or system bus data parity error.
651-735 292 Intermediate or system bus time-out error.
651-736 292 Intermediate or system bus time-out error.
651-740 2D3 Note: Ensure that the system IPLROS and service processor are at the latest
firmware level before removing any parts from the system.
651-741 2D3 Service processor error accessing special registers.
651-742 2D3 Service processor reports unknown communication error.
651-743 2D5 Service processor error accessing Vital Product Data EEPROM.
651-745 2D9 Service processor error accessing power controller.
651-746 2D4 Service processor error accessing fan sensor.
651-747 2D5 Service processor error accessing thermal sensor.
651-748 2E2 Service processor error accessing voltage sensor.
651-750 2D4 Service processor detected NVRAM error.
651-751 2D4 Service processor error accessing real-time clock/time-of-day clock.
651-752 2D4 Service processor error accessing JTAG/COP controller/hardware.
651-753 151 Service processor detects loss of voltage from the time-of-day clock backup battery.
2D4
651-770 292 Intermediate or system bus address parity error.
651-771 292 Intermediate or system bus data parity error.
651-772 292 Intermediate or system bus time-out error.
651-773 227 Intermediate or system bus data parity error.

74 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
651-780 2C7 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-781 2C7 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-784 302 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-785 303 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-786 304 Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-789 2CD Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-78A 2CE Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-78B 2CC Uncorrectable memory error. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
214 page 106.
651-809 Power fault warning due to unspecified cause. Action: Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
651-810 2E2 Over-voltage condition was detected. Action: Shut the system down and do the
following before replacing any FRUs:
1. Visually inspect the power cables and reseat the connectors.
2. Run the following command diag -Avd sysplanar0. When the Resource Repair
Action menu displays, select sysplanar0.
651-811 2E2 Under voltage condition was detected Action: Shut the system down and do the
following before replacing any FRUs.
1. Visually inspect the power cables and reseat the connectors.
2. Run the following command diag -Avd sysplanar0. When the Resource Repair
Action menu displays, select sysplanar0.
651-813 System shutdown due to loss of ac power to the site. Action: System resumed normal
operation, no action required.
651-818 Power fault due to manual activation of power-off request. Action: Resume normal
operation.
651-820 2E1 An over-temperature condition was detected. Action:
1. Make sure that:
v The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment
v There is unrestricted air flow around the system
2. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
651-821 2E1 System shutdown due to an over maximum temperature condition being reached.
Action:
1. Make sure that:
v The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment
v There is unrestricted air flow around the system
2. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
651-822 2E1 System shutdown due to over temperature condition and fan failure. Use the physical
FRU location(s) as the probable cause(s). Action: Use the physical location codes to
replace the FRUs that are identified on the diagnostics problem report screen.
651-831 2E2 Sensor detected a voltage outside of the normal range. Action: Go to “Performing the
checkout procedure” on page 106.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 75
 SRN FFC Description and action
651-832 G2E1 Sensor detected an abnormally high internal temperature. Action: Make sure that:
1. The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment.
2. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
3. There are no fan failures.
651-841 152 Sensor detected a voltage outside of the normal range. Go to “Performing the
2E2 checkout procedure” on page 106.
651-842 2E1 Sensor detected an abnormally high internal temperature. Action: Make sure that:
1. The room ambient temperature is within the system operating environment.
2. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
3. All system covers are closed.
4. There are no fan failures.
651-90x Platform-specific error. Action: Call your support center.
652-600 A non-critical error has been detected: uncorrectable memory or unsupported
memory. Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Examine the memory modules and
determine if they are supported types. If the modules are supported, then replace the
appropriate memory modules.
652-610 210 A non-critical error has been detected: CPU internal error. Action: Schedule deferred
maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
652-611 210 A non-critical error has been detected: CPU internal cache or cache controller error.
Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-612 D01 A non-critical error has been detected: external cache parity or multi-bit ECC error.
Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-613 D01 A non-critical error has been detected: external cache ECC single-bit error. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-623 2C6 A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-630 307 A non-critical error has been detected: I/O expansion bus parity error. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-631 307 A non-critical error has been detected: I/O expansion bus time-out error. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-632 307 A non-critical error has been detected: I/O expansion bus connection failure. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-633 307 A non-critical error has been detected: I/O expansion unit not in an operating state.
Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-634 307 A non-critical error has been detected: internal device error. Action: Schedule deferred
maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
652-664 302 A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-665 303 A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.

76 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
652-666 304 A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-669 2CD A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred G maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on
page 106.
652-66A 2CE A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-66B 2CC A non-critical error has been detected: correctable error threshold exceeded. Action:
Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page
106.
652-731 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus address parity
error. Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
652-732 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus data parity error.
Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-733 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus address parity
292 error. Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout
procedure” on page 106.
652-734 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus data parity error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-735 2D2 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus time-out error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-736 2D2 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus time-out error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-770 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate system bus address parity error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-771 2C8 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus data parity error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-772 2D2 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus time-out error.
292 Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-773 227 A non-critical error has been detected: intermediate or system bus data parity error.
Action: Schedule deferred maintenance. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure”
on page 106.
652-88x The CEC or SPCN reported a non-critical error. Action: Schedule deferred
maintenance. Refer to the entry MAP in this system unit's system service guide, with
the 8-digit error and location codes, for the necessary repair action. If the 8-digit error
and location codes were NOT reported, then run diagnostics in problem determination
mode and record and report the 8-digit error and location codes for this SRN.
652-89x The CEC or SPCN reported a non-critical error. Action: Schedule deferred
maintenance. Refer to the entry MAP in this system unit's system service guide, with
the 8-digit error and location codes, for the necessary repair action. If the 8-digit error
and location codes were NOT reported, then run diagnostics in problem determination
mode and record and report the 8-digit error and location codes for this SRN.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 77
 SRN FFC Description and action
814-112 814 The NVRAM test failed.
814-113 221 The VPD test failed.
814-114 814 I/O Card NVRAM test failed.
815-100 815 The floating-point processor test failed.
815-101 815 Floating point processor failed.
815-102 815 Floating point processor failed.
815-200 815 Power-on self-test indicates a processor failure.
7C0
815-201 815 Processor has a status of failed. Processors with a failed status are deconfigured and
therefore cannot be tested or used by the system.
817-123 817 The I/O planar time-of-day clock test failed.
817-124 817 Time of day RAM test failed.
817-210 817 The time-of-day clock is at POR.
817-211 817 Time of day POR test failed.
817-212 151 The battery is low.
817-213 817 The real-time clock is not running.
817-215 817 Time of day clock not running test failed.
817-217 817 Time of day clock not running.
887-101 887 POS register test failed.
887-102 887I/O register test failed.
887-103 887 Local RAM test failed.
887-104 887 Vital Product Data (VPD) failed.
887-105 887 LAN coprocessor internal tests failed.
887-106 887 Internal loopback test failed.
887-107 887 External loopback test failed.
887-108 887 External loopback test failed.
887-109 887 External loopback parity tests failed.
887-110 887 External loopback fairness test failed.
887-111 887 External loopback fairness and parity tests failed.
887-112 887 External loopback (twisted pair) test failed.
887-113 887 External loopback (twisted pair) parity test failed.
887-114 887 Ethernet loopback (twisted pair) fairness test failed.
887-115 887 External loopback (twisted pair) fairness and parity tests failed.
887-116 887 Twisted pair wrap data failed.
887-117 887 Software device configuration fails.
887-118 887 Device driver indicates a hardware problem.
887-120 887 Device driver indicates a hardware problem.
887-121 B08 Ethernet transceiver test failed.
887-122 B09 Ethernet 10 base-2 transceiver test failed.
887-123 887 Internal loopback test failed.
887-124 887 Software error log indicates a hardware problem.

78 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
887-125 887 Fuse test failed.
887-202 887 Vital Product Data test failed.
887-203 887 Vital Product Data test failed.
887-209 887 RJ-45 converter test failed.
887-304 887 Coprocessor internal test failed.
887-305 887 Internal loopback test failed.
887-306 887 Internal loopback test failed.
887-307 887 External loopback test failed.
887-319 887 Software device driver indicates a hardware failure.
887-400 887 Fuse test failed.
887-401 887 Circuit breaker for Ethernet test failed.
887-402 887 Ethernet 10 Base-2 transceiver test failed.
887-403 887 Ethernet 10 Base-T transceiver test failed.
887-405 887 Ethernet- network Rerun diagnostics in advanced mode for accurate problem
determination.
254E-201 254E Adapter configuration error.
221
254E-601 254 Error log analysis indicates adapter failure.
254E-602 254 Error log analysis indicates an error attention condition.
254E-603 254 Error log analysis indicates that the microcode could not be loaded on the adapter.
254E-604 254 Error log analysis indicates a permanent adapter failure.
254E-605 254 Error log analysis indicates permanent adapter failure is reported on the other port of
this adapter.
254E-606 254 Error log analysis indicates adapter failure.
254E-701 254E Error log analysis indicates permanent adapter failure.
221
254E-702 254E Error log analysis indicates permanent adapter failure is reported on the other port of
221 this adapter.
2567 USB integrated system-board and chassis assembly.
25A0 2631 Configuring I/O planar control logic for IDE bus devices.
25C4 Broadcom adapter
2631 2631 IDE controller - system-board and chassis assembly
2640-114 2640 IDE disk diagnostic failure
2640-115 2640 IDE disk error on open or configuring device system-board and chassis assembly -
2631 IDE controller
2640-121 2640 Physical volume hardware error.
2640-131 2640 Smart status threshold exceeded.
2640-132 2640 Command timeouts threshold exceeded.
2640-133 2640 Command timeout with error condition.
2640-134 2640 Hardware command or DMA failure.
2640-135 2640 IDE DMA error with no error status.
2640-136 2640 Timeout waiting for controller or drive with no busy status.
2631

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 79
 SRN FFC Description and action
25C4-201 25C4 Configuration error. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
25C4-701 25C4 Permanent adapter failure. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
25C4-601 25C4 Download firmware error. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
25C4-602 25C4 EEPROM read error. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
2D02 2631 Generic reference for USB controller/adapter - system-board and chassis assembly
FFC-724 FFC Temporary device bus interface problem.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
FFC-725 FFC Temporary device bus interface problem.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

SRNs A00-(x)xxx through A24-(x)xxx

Note: Some SRNs in this chapter may have 4 rather than 3 digits after the dash
(–).

The x in the following SRNs will have a value of 1, 2, 4, or 8, with a meaning as

follows:

Number Meaning
1 Replace all FRUs listed
2 Hot swap supported
4 Software might be the cause
8 Reserved

SRN Description FRU/action

A00-FF0 Error log analysis is unable to determine the 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
error. The error log indicates the following log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
physical FRU locations as the probable checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
causes. “POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-00x Error log analysis indicates an error detected 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
by the CPU, but the failure could not be log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

80 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A01-01x GCPU internal error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-02x CPU internal cache or cache controller error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-05x System bus time-out error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-06x Time-out error waiting for I/O. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-07x System bus parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A01-08x System bus protocol/transfer error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-00x Error log analysis indicates an error detected 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
by the memory controller, but the failure log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
could not be isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-01x Uncorrectable Memory Error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 81
 SRN Description FRU/action
A02-03x Correctable error threshold exceeded. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-04x Memory Control subsystem internal error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-05x Memory Address Error (invalid address or 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
access attempt). log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-06x Memory Data error (Bad data going to 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory). log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-09x System bus parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-10x System bus time-out error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-11x System bus protocol/transfer error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console,
see“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A02-12x I/O Host Bridge time-out error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

82 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A02-13x I/O Host Bridge address/data parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-00x Error log analysis indicates an error detected 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
by the I/O device, but the failure could not be log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-01x I/O Bus Address parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-05x I/O Error on non-PCI bus. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-07x System bus address parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-09x System bus data parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-11x System bus time-out error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-12x Error on System bus. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 83
 SRN Description FRU/action
A03-13x I/O Expansion bus parity error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-14x I/O Expansion bus time-out error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-15x I/O Expansion bus connection failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A03-16x I/O Expansion unit not in an operating state. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-00x Error log analysis indicates an environmental 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
and power warning, but the failure could not log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
be isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-01x Sensor indicates a fan has failed. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-02x System shutdown due to a fan failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-03x Sensor indicates a voltage outside normal 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
range. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

84 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A05-04x System shutdown due to voltage outside 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
normal range. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-05x Sensor indicates an abnormally high internal 1. Make sure that:
temperature.
a. The room ambient temperature is within the
system operating environment.
b. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
c. All system covers are closed.
d. There are no fan failures
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-06x System shutdown due to abnormally high 1. Make sure that:
internal temperature.
a. The room ambient temperature is within the
system operating environment.
b. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
c. All system covers are closed.
d. There are no fan failures
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-07x Sensor indicates a power supply has failed. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-08x System shutdown due to power supply 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-10x System shutdown due to FRU that has failed. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 85
 SRN Description FRU/action
A05-14x System shutdown due to power fault with an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
unspecified cause. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-19x System shutdown due to Fan failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-21x System shutdown due to Over temperature 1. Make sure that:
condition.
a. The room ambient temperature is within the
system operating environment.
b. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
c. All system covers are closed.
d. There are no fan failures
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-22x System shutdown due to over temperature 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
and fan failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A05-24x Power Fault specifically due to internal 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
battery failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-00x Error log analysis indicates an error detected 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
by the Service Processor, but the failure log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
could not be isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-06x Service Processor reports unknown 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
communication error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

86 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A0D-07x Internal service processor firmware error or 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
incorrect version. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-08x Other internal Service Processor hardware 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-09x Service Processor error accessing Vital 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Product Data EEPROM. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-18x Service Processor detected NVRAM error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-19x Service Processor error accessing Real Time 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Clock/Time-of-Day Clock. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-21x Service Processor detect error with 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Time-of-Day Clock backup battery. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-23x Loss of heart beat from Service Processor. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-24x Service Processor detected a surveillance 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
time-out. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 87
 SRN Description FRU/action
A0D-31x Error detected while handling an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
attention/interrupt from the system hardware. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-35x Mainstore or Cache IPL Diagnostic Error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-36x Other IPL Diagnostic Error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-37x Clock or PLL Error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-38x Hardware Scan or Initialization Error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A0D-40x FRU Presence/Detect Error (Mis-Plugged). 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A10-100 The resource is unavailable due to an error. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
System is operating in degraded mode. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A10-200 The resource was marked failed by the 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
platform. The system is operating in log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
degraded mode. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

88 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A10-210 The processor has been deconfigured. The 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system is operating in degraded mode. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A11-00x A non-critical error has been detected. Error 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log analysis indicates an error detected by log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
the CPU, but the failure could not be isolated. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A11-01x A non-critical error has been detected, a CPU 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
internal error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A11-02x A non-critical error has been detected, a CPU 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
internal cache or cache controller error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A11-03x A non-critical error has been detected, an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
external cache parity or multi-bit ECC error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, see “Solving undetermined
problems” on page 135
A11-05x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus time-out error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A11-06x A non-critical error has been detected, a Check the BladeCenter management module event log
time-out error waiting for an I/O device. for an entry around this time. If no entry is found,
replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
A11-50x Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
unrecoverable error.
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 89
 SRN Description FRU/action
A11-510 Resource has been deconfigured and is no 1. Schedule maintenance; the system is operating in a
longer in use due to a trend toward an degraded mode.
unrecoverable error.
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
A11-540 Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
unrecoverable error.
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
A11-550 Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
unrecoverable error.
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
A12-00x A non-critical error has been detected. Error 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log analysis indicates an error detected by log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
the memory controller, but the failure could checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
not be isolated. “POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-01x A non-critical error has been detected, an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
uncorrectable memory error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-02x A non-critical error has been detected, an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
ECC correctable error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-03x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
correctable error threshold exceeded. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-04x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory control subsystem internal error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

90 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A12-05x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory address error (invalid address or log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
access attempt). checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-06x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory data error (bad data going to log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
memory). checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-07x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory bus/switch internal error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-08x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
memory time-out error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-09x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-10x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus time-out error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-11x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus protocol/transfer error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-12x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
host bridge time-out error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 91
 SRN Description FRU/action
A12-13x A non-critical error has been detected, a I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
host bridge address/data parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-15x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system support function error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-16x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus internal hardware/switch error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A12-50x Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
unrecoverable error.
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
A13-00x A non-critical error has been detected, a error 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log analysis indicates an error detected by log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
the I/O device, but the failure could not be checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
isolated. “POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-01x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
bus address parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-02x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
bus data parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-03x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
bus time-out, access or other error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

92 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A13-04x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
bridge/device internal error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-05x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
error on non-PCI bus. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-06x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
mezzanine bus address parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-07x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus address parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-09x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus data parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-11x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
system bus time-out error log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-12x A non-critical error has been detected, an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
error on system bus. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-13x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
expansion bus parity error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 93
 SRN Description FRU/action
A13-14x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
expansion bus time-out error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-15x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
expansion bus connection failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-16x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
expansion unit not in an operating state. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A13-50x Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log for an entry around this time. If no entry is
unrecoverable error.
found, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
A15-01x Sensor indicates a fan is turning too slowly. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-03x Sensor indicates a voltage outside normal 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
range. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-05x Sensor indicates an abnormally high internal 1. Make sure that:
temperature.
a. The room ambient temperature is within the
system operating environment.
b. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
c. All system covers are closed.
d. There are no fan failures
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

94 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A15-07x Sensor indicates a power supply has failed. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-11x Sensor detected a redundant fan failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-12x Sensor detected redundant power supply 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-13x Sensor detected a redundant FRU that has 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
failed. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-14x Power fault due to unspecified cause. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-17x Internal redundant power supply failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-19x Fan failure. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-20x Non-critical cooling problem, loss of 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
redundant fan. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 95
 SRN Description FRU/action
A15-21x Over temperature condition. 1. Make sure that:
a. The room ambient temperature is within the
system operating environment.
b. There is unrestricted air flow around the system.
c. All system covers are closed.
d. There are no fan failures
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-22x Fan failure and Over temperature condition. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-23x Non-critical power problem, loss of redundant 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
power supply. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-24x Power Fault specifically due to internal 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
battery failure. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A15-50x Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
unrecoverable error.
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-00x A non-critical error has been detected. Error 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log analysis indicates an error detected by log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
the Service Processor, but the failure could checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
not be isolated. “POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-02x A non-critical error has been detected, an I/O 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
(I2C) general bus error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

96 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A1D-04x A non-critical error has been detected, an 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
internal service processor memory error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-05x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor error accessing special log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
registers. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-06x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor reports unknown log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
communication error. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-07x A non-critical error has been detected,: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Internal service processor firmware error or log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
incorrect version. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-08x A non-critical error has been detected, 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
another internal service processor hardware log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
error. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-09x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor error accessing vital log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
product data EEPROM. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-12x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor error accessing fan sensor. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-13x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor error accessing a thermal log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
sensor. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 97
 SRN Description FRU/action
A1D-18x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor detected NVRAM error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-19x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor error accessing real time log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
clock/time-of-day clock. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-20x A non-critical error has been detected: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Service processor error accessing scan log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
controller/hardware. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-21x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor detected error with log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
time-of-day clock backup battery. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-23x A non-critical error has been detected: Loss 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
of heart beat from Service Processor. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-24x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service processor detected a surveillance log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
time-out. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-29x A non-critical error has been detected, a 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
service process error accessing power log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
control network. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-30x A non-critical error has been detected: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Non-supported hardware. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

98 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN Description FRU/action
A1D-31x A non-critical error has been detected: Error 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
detected while handling an attention/interrupt log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
from the system hardware. checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-34x A non-critical error has been detected: Wire 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Test Error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-35x A non-critical error has been detected: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Mainstore or Cache IPL Diagnostic Error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-37x A non-critical error has been detected: Clock 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
or PLL Error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-38x A non-critical error has been detected: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Hardware Scan or Initialization Error. log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-40x A non-critical error has been detected: 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
Presence/Detect Error (Mis-Plugged). log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A1D-50x Recoverable errors on resource indicate a 1. If repair is not immediately available, reboot and the
trend toward an unrecoverable error. resource will be deconfigured; operations can
However, the resource could not be continue in a degraded mode.
deconfigured and is still in use. The system is
2. Check the BladeCenter management module event
operating with the potential for an
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
unrecoverable error.
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 99
 SRN Description FRU/action
A24-000 Spurious interrupts on shared interrupt level 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
have exceeded threshold log. If an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace part numbers reported by the diagnostic
program.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.
A24-xxx Spurious interrupts have exceeded threshold. 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event
log; if an error was recorded by the system or if a
checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace part numbers reported by the diagnostic
program.
3. If no entry is found, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

SRNs for SCSI Devices (ssss-102 through ssss-640)

Use the following table to identify an SRN when you suspect a SCSI device
problem. Replace the parts in the order that the FFCs are listed.
Notes:
1. Some SRNs in this chapter may have 4 rather than 3 digits after the dash (–).
2. The ssss before the dash (–) represents the 3 or 4 digit SCSI SRN.

SRN FFC Description and action

ssss-102 ssss An unrecoverable media error occurred.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-104 ssss The motor failed to restart.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-105 ssss The drive did not become ready.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-106 ssss The electronics card test failed.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

100 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
ssss-108 ssss The bus test failed.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-110 ssss The media format is corrupted.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-112 ssss The diagnostic test failed.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-114 ssss An unrecoverable hardware error.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-116 ssss A protocol error.
1. Make sure that the device, adapter and diagnostic firmware, and the application
software levels are compatible.
2. If you do not find a problem, call your operating-system support person.
ssss-117 ssss A write-protect error occurred.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-118 ssss A SCSI command time-out occurred.
252B 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-120 ssss A SCSI busy or command error.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 101

 SRN FFC Description and action
ssss-122 ssss A SCSI reservation conflict error.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-124 ssss A SCSI check condition error occurred.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-126 ssss A software error was caused by a hardware failure.
252B 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-128 252B The error log analysis indicates a hardware failure.
ssss 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
software by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-129 252B Error log analysis indicates a SCSI bus problem.
ssss 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
software by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-130 ssss Error log analysis indicates a problem reported by the disk drive's self-monitoring
function.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-132 ssss A disk drive hardware error occurred.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-134 252B The adapter failed to configure.
software 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

102 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 SRN FFC Description and action
ssss-135 ssss The device failed to configure.
252B 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
software by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-136 ssss The certify operation failed.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-137 ssss Unit attention condition has occurred on the Send Diagnostic command.
252B 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-138 ssss Error log analysis indicates that the disk drive is operating at a higher than
recommended temperature.
1. Make sure that:
v The ventilation holes in the blade server bezel are not blocked.
v The management module event log is not reporting any system environmental
warnings.
2. If the problem remains, call IBM support.
ssss-140 199 Error log analysis indicates poor signal quality.
252B 1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
ssss by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
ssss-640 ssss Error log analysis indicates a path error.
1. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an error was recorded
by the system or if a checkpoint code is displayed on the console, see “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
2. Replace any parts reported by the diagnostic program.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 103

Failing function codes
Failing function codes (FFCs) represent functions within the system unit.

Note: When replacing a component, perform system verification for the component
(see “Using the diagnostics program” on page 111).

FFC Description and notes

151 1. Battery
Note: After replacing the battery, make sure that:
a. The time and date are set.
b. Network IP addresses are set (for blade servers that start up from a
network).
2. System-board and chassis assembly
152 System-board and chassis assembly
166 Check management module event log for a BladeCenter blower or fan fault.
(See the documentation that comes with the BladeCenter unit.)
210 System-board and chassis assembly
212 System-board and chassis assembly (cache problem)
214 System-board and chassis assembly
217 System-board and chassis assembly
219 Common Memory Logic problem for memory DIMMs.
Note: If more than one pair of memory DIMMs are reported missing:
1. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly
2. Replace the memory DIMM at the physical location code that is reported
221 System-board and chassis assembly
226 System-board and chassis assembly
227 System-board and chassis assembly
241 Ethernet network problem
282 System-board and chassis assembly
292 System-board and chassis assembly (Host – PCI bridge problem)
293 System-board and chassis assembly (PCI – PCI bridge problem)
294 System-board and chassis assembly (MPIC interrupt controller problem)
296 PCI device or adapter problem.
Note: The replacement part can only be identified by the location code
reported by diagnostics.
2C4 System-board and chassis assembly
2C6 512 MB DIMM
1 GB DIMM
2 GB DIMM
4 GB DIMM
2C7 System-board and chassis assembly (Memory controller)
2C8 System-board and chassis assembly
2C9 System-board and chassis assembly
2CC 1 GB memory module
2CE 512 MB memory module
2D2 System-board and chassis assembly (Mezzanine bus arbiter problem)

104 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
FFC Description and notes
2D3 System-board and chassis assembly
2D4 System-board and chassis assembly (System/SP interface logic problem)
2D5 System-board and chassis assembly (I2C primary)
2D6 System-board and chassis assembly (I2C secondary)
2D7 System-board and chassis assembly (VPD module)
2D9 System-board and chassis assembly (Power controller)
2E0 System-board and chassis assembly (Fan sensor problem)
2E1 System-board and chassis assembly (Thermal sensor problem)
2E2 System-board and chassis assembly (Voltage sensor problem)
2E3 System-board and chassis assembly (Serial port controller problem)
2E4 System-board and chassis assembly (JTAG/COP controller problem)
2E8 System-board and chassis assembly (Cache controller)
303 Memory module 512 MB
304 Memory module 1 GB
308 System-board and chassis assembly (I/O bridge problem)
650 Unknown hard disk drive.
Note: This FFC indicates that the hard disk drive could not properly
configure.
711 Unknown adapter
7C0 System-board and chassis assembly (CPU/system interface)
812 System-board and chassis assembly (Common standard adapter logic
problem)
814 System-board and chassis assembly (NVRAM problem)
815 System-board and chassis assembly (floating point processor problem)
817 System-board and chassis assembly (time-of-day logic)
820 System-board and chassis assembly (interprocessor related testing
problem)
887 System-board and chassis assembly (integrated Ethernet adapter)
893 Vendor LAN adapter
D01 System-board and chassis assembly (cache problem)
E19 System-board and chassis assembly (power supply sensor failed)
252B System-board and chassis assembly (SAS controller)
2552 SAS 36.4 GB hard disk drive
2553 SAS 73.4 GB hard disk drive
2567 System-board and chassis assembly (USB integrated adapter)
25A0 System-board and chassis assembly
25C4 Broadcom Ethernet adapter
2631 System-board and chassis assembly
2D02 System-board and chassis assembly (generic USB reference to
controller/adapter)

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 105

Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the blade server.

About the checkout procedure

Before performing the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The firmware diagnostic program provides the primary methods of testing the
major components of the blade server. If you are not sure whether a problem is
caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the firmware diagnostic
program to confirm that the hardware is working correctly. The firmware
diagnostic program runs automatically when the blade server is turned on.
v A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually
will not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If there are multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs that
indicate a microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a
microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 118 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v If the blade server is halted and a POST checkpoint code is displayed, see
“POST checkpoint codes” on page 9. If the blade server is halted and no error
message is displayed, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 113 and “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 135.
v For intermittent problems, check the management module event log and “POST
checkpoint codes” on page 9.
v If the blade server front panel shows no LEDs, verify the blade server status and
errors in the BladeCenter Web interface; also see “Solving undetermined
problems” on page 135.
v If device errors occur, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 113.

Performing the checkout procedure

To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
Step
001 Perform the following steps:
1. If the blade server is running, turn off the blade server.
2. Turn on the blade server and establish an SOL session; then
continue to Step
002. If the blade server does not start, see
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 113.
Step
002 Check for the following information:
1. If the firmware hangs on an eight-digit progress code, see
“Progress codes” on page 10.
2. If the firmware displays an eight-digit error code, see “Attention
codes” on page 34 or “Error codes” on page 37.
3. If the firmware displays a service request number (SRN), see
“SRN tables” on page 67.

106 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 4. Check the BladeCenter management module event log. If an
error was recorded by the system, see “Attention codes” on
page 34 or “Error codes” on page 37.
5. If no error was recorded, or if the login prompt appears and you
still suspect a problem, continue to Step
003.
Step
003 Is the operating system AIX?
Yes Record any information or messages that may be provided
on the system console; then go to Step
005.
No Go to Step
004.
Step
004 Is the operating system Linux?
Yes Record any information or messages that may be provided
on the system console; then go to Step
007. If you cannot
load the Standalone Diagnostics CD, answer this question
No.
No Go to “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.
Step
005 Perform the following steps:

Note: When possible, run AIX Online Diagnostics in concurrent

mode. AIX Online Diagnostics perform additional functions,
compared to the Standalone Diagnostics CD.
1. Perform the AIX online diagnostics, see “Starting AIX concurrent
diagnostics” on page 108. Record any diagnostic results and
see the “SRN tables” on page 67 to identify the failing
component.

Note: When replacing a component, perform system

verification for the component (see “Using the diagnostics
program” on page 111).
2. If you cannot perform AIX concurrent online diagnostics;
continue to Step
006.
Step
006 Perform the following steps:
1. Use the management-module Web interface to make sure that
the device from which you load the standalone diagnostics is
set as the first device in the blade server boot sequence.
2. Turn off the system unit power and wait 45 seconds before
proceeding.
3. Turn on the blade server and establish an SOL session.
4. Check for the following responses:
a. Progress codes are displayed on the console.
b. Record any messages or diagnostic information that may be
displayed on the system console.
5. Load the Standalone Diagnostics. Go to “Starting standalone
diagnostics from a CD” on page 109 or “Starting standalone
diagnostics from a NIM server” on page 110.
6. If you have replaced the failing component, perform system
verification for the component (see “Using the diagnostics
program” on page 111
This ends the AIX procedure.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 107

 Step
007 Perform the following steps:
1. Use the management-module Web interface to make sure that
the device from which you load the standalone diagnostics is
set as the first device in the blade server boot sequence.
2. Turn off the blade server and wait 45 seconds before
proceeding.
3. Turn on the blade server and establish an SOL session.
4. Check for the following responses:
a. Progress codes are displayed on the console.
b. Record any messages or diagnostic information that may be
displayed on the system console.
Continue with step
008.
Step
008 Load the Standalone Diagnostics. Go to “Starting standalone
diagnostics from a CD” on page 109 or “Starting standalone
diagnostics from a NIM server” on page 110.
Can you load the standalone diagnostics?
No Go to “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.
Yes Select the resources to be tested and record any SRNs;
then go to “SRN tables” on page 67.
This ends the Linux procedure.

Verifying the partition configuration

Perform the following steps if there is a configuration problem with the system or a
logical partition.
1. Check the processor and memory allocations of the system or the partition.
Processor or memory resources that fail during system startup could cause the
startup problem in the partition. Make sure that there are enough functioning
processor and memory resources in the system for all the partitions.
2. Check the bus and virtual adapter allocations for the partition. Make sure that
the partition has load source and console I/O resources.
3. Make sure that the Boot Mode and Keylock partition properties are set to
Normal.
4. If the problem remains, contact your software service provider for further
assistance.

Running the diagnostics program

The diagnostics program can be started and run from the AIX operating system,
from a CD, or from a management server.

Starting AIX concurrent diagnostics

Perform the following steps to start AIX concurrent diagnostics from the AIX
operating system:
1. Log in to the AIX operating system as root user, or use CE login (see “Creating
a CE login” on page 168 for more information). If you need help, contact the
system operator.

108 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 2. Type diag and press Enter at the operating system prompt to start the
diagnostics program, and display the Function Selection menu (see “Using the
diagnostics program” on page 111 for more information about running the
diagnostics program).
3. When testing is complete, press F3 until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions
screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the diagnostic program.

Starting standalone diagnostics from a CD

Perform the following steps to start the standalone diagnostics from a CD. These
procedures can be used if the blade server is running a Linux operating system or if
an AIX operating system cannot start the concurrent diagnostics program.

The latest version of the standalone diagnostics can be downloaded from the World
Wide Web at http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/diags/home.html.
1. Verify with the system administrator and systems users that the blade server
may be shut down. Stop all programs; then, shut down the operating system
and shut down the blade server (refer to the documentation that comes with
your operating system documentation for information about shutting down the
operating system).
2. Press the CD button on the front of the blade server to give it ownership of the
BladeCenter media tray.
3. Using the management module Web interface, make sure that:
v The blade server firmware is at the latest version.
v SOL is enabled for the blade server.
v The CD or DVD drive is selected as the first boot device for the blade server.
4. Insert the Standalone Diagnostics CD into the CD or DVD drive.
5. Turn on the blade server and establish an SOL session.

Note: It can take from 3 to 5 minute to load the standalone diagnostics from
the CD. Please be patient.
The screen will display “Please define the System Console.”
6. Type 1 and press Enter to continue.
The Diagnostic Operating Instructions screen will display.
7. Press Enter to continue.
The Function Selection screen will display. (See “Using the diagnostics
program” on page 111 for more information about running the diagnostics
program.)

Note: If the Define Terminal screen is displayed, type the terminal type and
press Enter. The use of “vs100” as the terminal type is recommended; however,
the function keys (F#) may not work. In this case, press Esc and the number in
the screen menus. For example, instead of F3 you can press the Esc key and
the 3 key.
8. When testing is complete, press F3 until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions
screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the diagnostic program.
9. Remove the CD from the CD or DVD drive.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 109

Starting standalone diagnostics from a NIM server
Perform the following steps to start the standalone diagnostics from a network
installation management (NIM) server.

Note: Refer to the Network Installation Management Guide and Reference for
information about configuring the blade server as a NIM server client.
1. Verify with the system administrator and systems users that the blade server
may be shut down. Stop all programs; then, shut down the operating system
and shut down the blade server (refer to the documentation that comes with
your operating system for information about shutting down the operating
system).
2. If the system is running in a full-machine partition, turn on the blade server and
establish an SOL session.
3. Perform the following steps to check the NIM server boot settings:
a. When the POST menu is displayed, press the 1 key to start the SMS utility.
b. From the SMS main menu, select Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program
Load).
c. From the NIC Adapters menu, select the network adapter that is attached to
the NIM server.
d. From the Network Parameters menu, select IP Parameters.
e. Enter the client, server, and gateway IP addresses (if applicable), and enter
the subnet mask. If there is no gateway between the NIM server and the
client, set the gateway address to 0.0.0.0 (see your network administrator to
determine if there is a gateway).
f. If the NIM server is setup to allow the pinging of the client system, use the
Ping Test option on the Network Parameters menu to verify that the client
system can ping the NIM server.

Note: If the ping fails, see “Boot problem resolution” on page 112; then,
follow the steps for network boot problems.
4. Using the management module Web interface, make sure that the NIM server
network is selected as the first boot device for the blade server.
5. Restart the blade server and establish an SOL session.
If the Diagnostic Operating Instructions screen is displayed, the diagnostics
program has started successfully.

Note: If the AIX login prompt is displayed, the diagnostics program did not load.
See “Boot problem resolution” on page 112; then, follow the steps for network
boot problems.
6. Press Enter to continue.
The Function Selection screen will display. (See “Using the diagnostics
program” on page 111 for more information about running the diagnostics
program.)

Note: If the Define Terminal screen is displayed, type the terminal type and
press Enter. The use of “vs100” as the terminal type is recommended; however,
the function keys (F#) may not work. In this case, press Esc and the number in
the screen menus. For example, instead of F3 you can press the Esc key and
the 3 key.
7. When testing is complete, press F3 until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions
screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the diagnostic program.

110 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Using the diagnostics program
This section provides the basic procedures for running the diagnostics program.
1. Start the diagnostics from the AIX operating system, from a CD, or from a
management server (see “Starting AIX concurrent diagnostics” on page 108,
“Starting standalone diagnostics from a CD” on page 109, or “Starting
standalone diagnostics from a NIM server” on page 110.
2. The Function Selection menu is displayed. Use the steps listed to perform one
of the following tasks:
v Problem Determination
a. From the Function Selection menu, select Diagnostic Routines and
press Enter.
b. From the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu, select Problem
Determination
c. Select the resource to be tested and press F7=Commit.
d. Record any results provided and go to “SRN tables” on page 67 to
identify the failure and perform the action(s).
e. When testing is complete, press F3 to return to the Diagnostic Selection
menu. If you want to run another test, press F3 again to return to the
Function Selection menu.
v System Verification
a. From the Function Selection menu, select Diagnostic Routines and
press Enter.
b. From the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu, select System Verification.
c. Select the resource to be tested and press F7=Commit.
d. Record any results provided and go to “SRN tables” on page 67 to
identify the failure and perform the action(s).
e. When testing is complete, press F3 to return to the Diagnostic Selection
menu. If you want to run another test, press F3 again to return to the
Function Selection menu.
v Task selection
a. From the Function Selection menu, select Task Selection and press
Enter.
b. Select the task to be run and press Enter.
c. If the Resource Selection List menu is displayed, select the resource on
which the task is to be run and press F7=Commit.
d. Follow the instruction for the selected task.
e. When the task is complete, press F3 to return to the Task Selection List
menu. If you want to run another test, press F3 again to return to the
Function Selection menu.
3. When testing is complete, press F3 until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions
screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the diagnostic program.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 111

Boot problem resolution
Depending on the boot device, a checkpoint may be displayed on the console for
an extended period of time while the boot image is retrieved from the device. This
is particularly true for CD and network boot attempts. When booting from a CD,
watch for a blinking activity LED on the CD or DVD drive. A blinking activity LED
indicates that the loading of either the boot image, or additional information required
by the operating system being booted, is still in progress. If the checkpoint is
displayed for an extended period of time and the CD- or DVD-drive activity LED is
not blinking, there might be a problem loading the boot image from the device.

Note: For network boot attempts, if the system is not connected to an active
network, or if there is no server configured to respond to the system's boot request,
the system will still attempt to boot. Because time-out durations are necessarily long
to accommodate retries, the system may appear to be hung.

If you suspect a problem loading the boot image, complete the following steps:

001 Make sure that your boot list is correct.
1. From the BladeCenter management-module Web interface, display the
boot sequences for the blade servers in your BladeCenter unit: Blade
Tasks → Configuration → Boot Sequence.
2. Find your blade server on the list that is displayed and make sure that
the device from which you are attempting to boot is the first device in
the boot sequence. If it is not, select your blade server from the list of
servers and modify the boot sequence. Cycle power on your blade
server to retry the boot.

Note: If Network is selected, the blade server will try to boot from both
Ethernet ports on the system board.
3. If this boot attempt fails, do the following:
a. If you are attempting to boot from the network, go to Step
002.
b. If you are attempting to boot from the CD or DVD drive, go to Step

003.
c. If you are attempting to boot from a hard disk drive, go to Step

004.

002 If you are attempting to boot from the network:
1. Make sure that the network cabling to the BladeCenter network switch
is correct.
2. Check with the network administrator to make sure that the network is
up.
3. Verify that the blade server for your system is running and configured to
respond to your system.
4. Turn the blade server power off; then, turn it on and retry the boot
operation.
5. If the boot still fails, replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

003 If you are attempting to boot from the CD or DVD drive:
1. From the BladeCenter management-module Web interface, make sure
that the media tray is assigned to your blade server: Blade Tasks →
Remote Control.
2. Turn the blade server power off; then, turn it on and retry the boot
operation.

112 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 3. If the boot fails, try a known-good bootable CD.
4. If possible, try to boot another blade server in the BladeCenter unit to
verify that the CD or DVD drive is functional.
v If the CD boots on the second server, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly in the JS21 blade server you were originally trying
to boot.
v If the CD fails on the second server, replace the CD or DVD drive in
the media tray.
5. If replacing the CD or DVD drive does not resolve the problem, replace
the media tray.
6. If booting on all servers fails using the new media tray, replace the
following in the BladeCenter unit:
v Management module
v Midplane

004 If you are attempting to boot from a hard disk drive.
1. Verify that the hard disk drive is installed. If you are trying to boot from
the second hard disk drive, verify that the second hard disk drive is
installed.
2. Select the CD or DVD drive as the boot device.
3. Go to “Performing the checkout procedure” on page 106.
4. Reload the operating system onto the hard disk drive if boot attempts
from that disk continue to fail.
5. Replace the suspect hard disk drive if you are not able to load the
operating system.
6. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly; then, retry loading the
operating system.

Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms. If these symptoms relate to shared BladeCenter unit resources, see
“Solving shared BladeCenter resource problems” on page 130.

If you cannot find the problem in these tables, see “Running the diagnostics
program” on page 108 for information about testing the blade server.

If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the blade server
is not working, complete the following steps before using the troubleshooting tables:
1. Remove the software or device that you just added.
2. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the blade server is running
correctly.
3. Reinstall the new software or new device.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 113

CD or DVD drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The CD or DVD drive is not 1. Make sure that:
recognized.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The correct device driver is installed for the CD or DVD drive.
2. Reseat the CD or DVD drive.
3. Replace the CD or DVD drive.
A CD or DVD is not working 1. Clean the CD or DVD.
correctly.
2. Reseat the CD or DVD drive.
3. Replace the CD or DVD drive.
The CD or DVD drive tray is not Note: The blade server must have ownership of the CD or DVD drive.
working. 1. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
2. Reseat the CD or DVD drive.
3. Replace the CD or DVD drive.
The CD or DVD drive is Establish a link between /dev/sr0 and /dev/cdrom as follows:
detected as /dev/sr0 by SUSE 1. Enter the following command:
LINUX. (If the SUSE LINUX
rm /dev/cdrom; ln -s /dev/sr0 /dev/cdrom
operating system is installed
remotely onto a blade server 2. Insert the following line in the /etc/fstab file:
that is not the current owner of /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom auto ro,noauto,user,exec 0 0
the media tray [CD or DVD
drive, diskette drive, and USB
port], SUSE LINUX detects the
CD or DVD drive as /dev/sr0
instead of /dev/cdrom.)

114 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Diskette drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Diskette drive activity LED stays 1. If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
on, or the system bypasses the v The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
diskette drive. v The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you have
one.) The drive light comes on (one-second flash) when the diskette is
inserted.
v The diskette contains the necessary files to start the computer.
v The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility program.
v The software program is working properly.
v The cable is installed correctly (in the proper orientation).
2. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, be sure the distance between
monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3 in.).
3. Reseat the following components:
a. Diskette drive cable.
b. Diskette drive
c. Media tray card
4. Replace the components listed in step 3 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the blade server each time.

General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar trained service technician.
problem has occurred.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 115

Hard disk drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Not all drives are recognized by 1. Remove the first drive not recognized; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic
the hard disk drive firmware or test again.
operating system.
2. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive that you removed with
a new one.
System stops responding during 1. Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the blade server
hard disk drive operating stopped responding; then, run the diagnostic test again.
system commands to test or
2. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test runs successfully, replace the drive you
look for bad blocks.
removed with a new one.

Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only 1. Make sure that:
occasionally and is difficult to
v When the blade server is turned on, air is flowing from the rear of the blade
diagnose.
server at the blower grill. If there is no airflow, the blower is not working. This
causes the blade server to overheat and shut down.
v Ensure that the SCSI bus and devices are configured correctly.
2. Check the management module event log for errors

116 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Keyboard problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the 1. Make sure that:
keyboard do not work.
v The keyboard/video select button LED on the front of the blade server is lit,
indicating that the blade server has ownership of the keyboard and video.
v The keyboard cable is securely connected to the BladeCenter management
module.
v If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, the keyboard cable is connected to the
proper connector.
v The blade server is using a supported Linux operating system that has
loaded completely and supports USB devices.
v The blade server and the monitor are turned on.
2. Replace the keyboard.
3. Replace the management module on the BladeCenter unit; see the Hardware
Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem Determination and
Service Guide for your BladeCenter unit.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 117

Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory 1. Make sure that:
displayed is less than the v All installed memory is recognized in the Display Vital Product Data of lscfg
amount of physical memory -vp.
installed. v The memory modules are seated properly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration with the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
v All banks of memory on the DIMMs are enabled. The blade server might
have automatically disabled a DIMM bank when it detected a problem or a
DIMM bank could have been manually disabled.
2. Check the management module event log for error message (checkpoint or
firmware error codes).
v If the DIMM was disabled by a system-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If the DIMM was disabled by POST, obtain the eight-digit error code and
replace the failing DIMM.
3. Reseat the DIMM.
4. Replace the DIMM.
5. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The blade server will not boot or 1. If a checkpoint or firmware error was logged in the management module event
a checkpoint or firmware error log, correct that error.
code is logged in the
2. If no error was logged, restart the blade server and check the management
management module event log
module event log again for error codes.
(the startup microprocessor is
not working correctly) 3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

118 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Monitor or video problems
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose the problem, call for
service.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The screen is blank. 1. Make sure that:
v The keyboard/video select button LED on the front of the blade server is lit,
indicating that the blade server has ownership of the keyboard and video.
v The monitor cables are connected properly.
v The monitor is turned on and the Brightness and Contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
v The blade server is using a supported Linux operating system that has
loaded completely.
2. If you have verified these items and the screen remains blank, replace:
a. Monitor
b. Management module on the BladeCenter unit (see the Hardware
Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem Determination
and Service Guide for your BladeCenter unit).
Only the cursor appears. Make sure that the keyboard/video ownership on the BladeCenter unit has not
been switched to another blade server. If the problem remains, see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 135.
The monitor goes blank when Make sure that the monitor cable is connected to the video port on the
you direct it to a working blade BladeCenter management module. Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If
server, or goes blank when you you suspect a problem with the monitor, see the information that comes with the
start some application programs monitor for adjusting and testing instructions.
in the blade servers.
If you still cannot find the problem, try using the monitor with another blade server.
If the problem remains, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual and
Troubleshooting Guide or Problem Determination and Service Guide for your
BladeCenter unit.
The screen is wavy, unreadable, 1. If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is working properly, consider the
rolling, distorted, or has screen location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
jitter. transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor. (Moving a color monitor while it is turned on
might cause screen discoloration.) Then move the device and the monitor at
least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, be sure the distance between
monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3 in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Replace the monitor.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 119

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the firmware or operating system
screen. with the correct language in the blade server that has ownership of the monitor.
2. Replace the monitor.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
No video. 1. Make sure that the correct blade server is selected, if applicable.
2. Make sure that all cables are fastened securely.

Network connection problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
One or more blade servers are 1. Make sure that:
unable to communicate with the v The I/O modules for the network interface being used are installed in the
network. correct BladeCenter bays and are configured and operating correctly. See
the Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem
Determination and Service Guide for your BladeCenter unit for details.
v The settings in the I/O module are appropriate for the blade server (settings
in the I/O module are blade-specific).
2. If the problem remains, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.

120 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Optional device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that was 1. Make sure that:
just installed does not work. v The option is designed for the blade server (see the ServerProven® list at
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the option.
v The option is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
2. If the option comes with its own test instructions, use those instructions to test
the option.
3. Reseat the device that you just installed.
4. Replace the device that you just installed.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 121

Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Power switch does not work 1. Reseat the control-panel connector.
and reset button, if supported,
2. Replace the bezel assembly.
does work.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
The blade server does not turn 1. Make sure that:
on. a. The power LED on the front of the BladeCenter unit is on.
b. The LEDs on all the BladeCenter power modules are on.
c. The blade server is in a blade bay that is supported by the power modules
installed in the BladeCenter unit.
d. The power-on LED on the blade server control panel is blinking slowly.
v If the power LED is flashing rapidly and continues to do so, the blade
server is not communicating with the management module; reseat the
blade server and go to step 3
v If the power LED is off, the blade bay is not receiving power, the blade
server is defective, or the LED information panel is loose or defective.
e. Local power control for the blade server is enabled (use the BladeCenter
management module Web interface to verify), or the blade server was
instructed through the management module Web interface to start.
2. If you just installed a device in the blade server, remove it, and restart the
blade server. If the blade server now starts, you might have installed more
devices than the power to that blade bay supports.
3. Try another blade server in the blade bay; if it works, replace the faulty blade
server.
4. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135.
The blade server turns off for no 1. Make sure that each blade bay has a blade server, expansion unit, or blade
apparent reason filler correctly installed. If these components are missing or incorrectly installed,
an over-temperature condition might result in shutdown.
2. If a microprocessor error LED is lit, replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
The blade server does not turn 1. Verify whether you are using an ACPI or non-ACPI operating system. If you are
off. using a non-ACPI operating system:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the system by holding the power-control button for 4 seconds.
c. If the blade server fails during POST and the power-control button does not
work, remove the blade server from the bay and reseat it.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system-board and chassis assembly.

122 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Service processor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Service processor in the Disconnect the BladeCenter unit from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds,
management module reports a reconnect the BladeCenter unit to the electrical sources, and restart the blade
general monitor failure. server. If the problem remains, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 135,
and the Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem
Determination and Service Guide for your BladeCenter unit.

Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software 1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
problem. v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software.
Note: If you have just installed an adapter or memory, the blade server
might have a memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the blade server.
v Other software works on the blade server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you received any error messages when using the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact your place of purchase of the software.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 123

Light path diagnostics
Light path diagnostics is a system of LEDs on the control panel and on the system
board of the blade server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the blade
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.

The system board LEDs can be lit for a short time after you remove the blade
server from the BladeCenter unit. After removing the blade server cover, press and
hold the light path diagnostics switch for a maximum of 25 seconds to light the
LEDs. Power remains available to light these LEDs for up to 24 hours after the
blade server is removed from the BladeCenter unit. These LEDs include error LEDs
for the following components:
v Microprocessors
v Memory modules (DIMMs)
v Hard disk drives
v I/O expansion option

Viewing the light path diagnostics LEDs

Before working inside the blade server to view light path diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 142.

If an error occurs, view the light path diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the control panel on the front of the blade server (see “Blade server
control panel buttons and LEDs” on page 4).
v If the information LED is lit, it indicates that information about a suboptimal
condition in the blade server is available in the management-module event
log.
v If the blade-error LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred; go to step
2.
2. To view the light path diagnostics panel and LEDs, complete the following steps:
a. Remove the blade server from the BladeCenter unit.
b. Place the blade server on a flat, static-protective surface.
c. Remove the cover from the blade server.
d. Press and hold the light path diagnostics switch to relight the LEDs that
were lit before you removed the blade server from the BladeCenter unit. The
LEDs will remain lit for as long as you press the switch, to a maximum of 25
seconds.

124 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 The following illustration shows the locations of the system board error LEDs.
DIMM 1 error LED (CR40) System-management processor error LED (CR27)
DIMM 2 error LED (CR45) NMI error LED (CR17)
DIMM 3 error LED (CR46) Temperature error LED (CR16)
DIMM 4 error LED (CR53) System board error LED (CR20)
Microprocessor 1 error LED (CR19)
I/O expansion option
error LED (CR34) Microprocessor 0 error LED (CR58)

Light path diagnostics

switch (SW1)

Hard disk drive 1 error LED (CR3)

Hard disk drive 0 error LED (CR4)

Light path diagnostics LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs on the system board, and suggested
actions to correct the detected problems.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED Description Action
None An error has occurred and cannot be isolated, An error has occurred that is not represented
or the service processor has failed. by a light path diagnostics LED. Check the
management module event log for information
about the error.
DIMM x error A memory error occurred. 1. Make sure that the DIMM indicated by the
lit LED is supported.
2. Reseat the DIMM indicated by the lit LED.
3. Replace the DIMM indicated by the lit LED.
Note: Multiple DIMM LEDs do not necessarily
indicate multiple DIMM failures. If more than
one DIMM LED is lit, reseat or replace one
DIMM at a time until the error goes away.
Refer to the Hardware Maintenance Manual
and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem
Determination and Service Guide for your
BladeCenter unit for further isolation.
Hard disk drive x A hard disk drive error occurred. 1. Reseat the hard disk drive indicated by the
error lit LED.
2. Replace the hard disk drive indicated by
the lit LED.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 125

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine which components are
CRUs and which components are FRUs.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED Description Action
I/O expansion A I/O expansion option error occurred. 1. Make sure that the I/O expansion option is
option error supported.
2. Reseat the I/O expansion option.
3. Replace the I/O expansion option.
Microprocessor x The microprocessor has failed. 1. Replace the blade server cover, reinsert
error the blade server in the BladeCenter unit,
and then restart the blade server.
2. Check the management module event log
for information about the error.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
NMI error The system board has failed. 1. Replace the blade server cover, reinsert
the blade server in the BladeCenter unit,
and then restart the blade server.
2. Check the management module event log
for information about the error.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
System board error The system board has failed 1. Replace the blade server cover, reinsert
the blade server in the BladeCenter unit,
and then restart the blade server.
2. Check the management module event log
for information about the error.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
System- The service processor has failed 1. Replace the blade server cover, reinsert
management the blade server in the BladeCenter unit,
processor error and then restart the blade server.
2. Check the management module event log
for information about the error.
3. Replace the system-board and chassis
assembly.
Temperature error The system temperature has exceeded a 1. Check to see if a blower on the
threshold level. BladeCenter unit has failed. If it has,
replace the blower (see the Hardware
Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting
Guide or Problem Determination and
Service Guide for your BladeCenter unit for
more information).
2. Make sure that the room temperature is not
too high. (See “Features and specifications”
on page 3 for temperature information.)

126 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Firmware problem isolation
To isolate a firmware problem, complete the following steps in the order in which
they are listed until the problem is solved.
Step
001 Perform the following steps:
1. If the blade server is operating, shut down the operating system
and turn off the blade server.
2. Turn on the blade server.
3. If the problem no longer occurs, no further action is necessary;
otherwise, continue to Step
002.
Step
002 Does the blade server boot up far enough to allow the installation of
server firmware updates?
Yes Check for server firmware updates; then, install the updates
if available.
No Continue to Step
003.
Step
003 Perform the following steps:
1. Go to “Recovering the system firmware.”
2. After recovering the system firmware, check for server firmware
updates; then, install the updates if available.

Recovering the system firmware

The system firmware is contained in two separate images in the flash memory of
the blade server: temporary and permanent. These images are referred to as TEMP
and PERM, respectively. The blade server normally starts from the TEMP image,
and the PERM image serves as a backup. If the TEMP image becomes damaged,
such as from a power failure during a firmware update, you can recover the TEMP
image from the PERM image.

If your system hangs, you can force the system to start from the PERM image
using the BIOS code page jumper (J14).
v Setting jumper J14 to pins 2 and 3 will force the blade server to start up from the
PERM image.
v Setting jumper J14 to pins 1 and 2 will enable the blade server to start (boot)
from either the TEMP or PERM image.

Starting the PERM image

To force the blade server to start the PERM (permanent) image, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the blade server.
2. Remove the blade server from the BladeCenter unit (see “Removing the blade
server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade-server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Locate the BIOS code page jumper (J14) on the system board (see
“System-board jumpers” on page 8).
5. Move the jumper to pins 2 and 3 to enable system firmware recovery mode.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 127

 Statement 21:

CAUTION:
Hazardous energy is present when the blade server is connected to the
power source. Always replace the blade cover before installing the blade
server.
6. Replace the cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page 146),
reinstall the blade server in the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144), and restart the blade server.
7. If the blade server starts up and displays the operating-system prompt, see
“Recovering the TEMP image from the PERM image” to restore the TEMP
image.

Note: If the blade server does not start up properly, replace the system-board and
chassis assembly.

Recovering the TEMP image from the PERM image

To recover the TEMP image from the PERM image, you must perform the reject
function. The reject function copies the PERM image into the TEMP image. To
perform the reject function, complete the following steps:
1. If you have not started the system from the PERM image, do so now (see
“Starting the PERM image” on page 127).
2. Reject the TEMP image.
v If you are using the Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux operating system, type
the following command:
update_flash -r
v If you are using the AIX® operating system, type the following command:
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/update_flash -r
3. Shut down the blade server using the operating system.
4. If you have not moved jumper J14 as described in “Starting the PERM image”
on page 127, restart the blade server.
5. If you moved jumper J14 as described in “Starting the PERM image” on page
127, complete the following steps:
a. Turn off the blade server.
b. Remove the blade server from the BladeCenter unit (see “Removing the
blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
c. Remove the blade-server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
d. Locate the BIOS code page jumper (J14) on the system board (see
“System-board jumpers” on page 8).
e. Move the jumper to pins 1 and 2.

128 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 Statement 21:

CAUTION:
Hazardous energy is present when the blade server is connected to the
power source. Always replace the blade cover before installing the
blade server.
f. Replace the cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page 146),
reinstall the blade server in the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144), and restart the blade server.
g. Verify that the system starts from the TEMP image (see “Verifying the
system firmware levels”).
You might need to update the firmware code to the latest version. See
“Updating the firmware” on page 165 for more information about how to update
the firmware code.

Verifying the system firmware levels

The diagnostics program displays what the current system firmware levels are for
the TEMP and PERM images. This function also displays which image the blade
server used to start up.
1. Load the diagnostics program (see “Running the diagnostics program” on page
108).
2. From the Function Selection menu, select Task Selection and press Enter.
3. From the Tasks Selection List menu, select Update and Manage System Flash
and press Enter.
The Update and Manage System Flash menu is displayed. The top of the
screen displays the system firmware level for the PERM and the TEMP images,
and the image that the blade server used to start up.

Note: If the TEMP image level is more current than the PERM image, see
“Committing the TEMP system firmware image.”
4. When you have verified the firmware levels, press F3 until the Diagnostic
Operating Instructions screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the
diagnostic program.

Committing the TEMP system firmware image

After updating the system firmware, and successfully starting up the blade server
from the TEMP image, copy TEMP image to the PERM image using the diagnostics
program commit function.
1. Load the diagnostics program (see “Running the diagnostics program” on page
108).
2. From the Function Selection menu, select Task Selection and press Enter.
3. From the Tasks Selection List menu, select Update and Manage System Flash
and press Enter.
4. From the Update and Manage System Flash menu, select Commit the
Temporary Image and press Enter.
5. When the commit function is complete, press F3 until the Diagnostic Operating
Instructions screen is displayed; then press F3 again to exit the diagnostic
program.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 129

Solving shared BladeCenter resource problems
Problems with BladeCenter shared resources might appear to be in the blade
server. The following sections provide procedures to help you isolate blade server
problems from shared BladeCenter resource problems. If the problem is thought to
be with a shared resource, see the Problem Determination and Service Guide or
the Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide for your
BladeCenter unit and other BladeCenter component documentation for additional
information. If the problem cannot be solved, see “Solving undetermined problems”
on page 135.

To check the general function of shared BladeCenter resources, complete the

following operations:
v Make sure that:
– The BladeCenter unit has the required power modules installed and is
connected to a working power source.
– Power management has been correctly set for your BladeCenter unit
configuration.
v Check if the problem is being experienced with more than one blade server.
Perform a test of the function on a known-good blade server.
v Try the blade server in a different blade bay.
v Try a known-good blade server in the blade bay.

Keyboard problems
To check for keyboard problems, complete the following steps until the problem is
solved:
1. Make sure that:
v Both the blade server and the monitor are turned on.
v The keyboard/video select button LED on the front of the blade server is lit,
indicating that the blade server is connected to the shared keyboard.
v The keyboard cable is securely connected to the active BladeCenter
management-module.
v The keyboard or mouse works with another blade server.
2. Check for correct management-module operation (see the documentation for
your BladeCenter unit).

Note: Some BladeCenter unit types have several management-module

components that might need to be tested or replaced (see the Installation Guide
for your management module for more information).
3. Replace the keyboard.
4. Replace the management module (see the documentation for your BladeCenter
unit).

If these steps do not resolve the problem, it is likely a problem with the blade
server. See “Keyboard problems” on page 117.

130 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Media tray problems
To check for problems with the media tray (removable media drives and USB ports),
complete the following steps until the problem is solved:
1. Make sure that:
v The media-tray select button LED on the front of the blade server is lit,
indicating that the blade server is connected to the shared media tray.
v The media tray devices work with another blade server.
2. Check if the problem affects more than one media tray component:
v USB ports
v Diskette drive
v CD or DVD drive
3. For problems affecting only a USB port:
a. Make sure that the USB device is operational. If using a USB hub, make
sure that the hub is operating correctly and that any software the hub
requires is installed. Plug the USB device directly into the USB port,
bypassing the hub, to check its operation.
b. Reseat the following components:
1) USB device cable
2) Media tray cable (if applicable)
3) Media tray
c. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the blade server each time:
1) USB cable (if applicable)
2) Media tray cable (if applicable)
3) Media tray
d. Continue with step 7 on page 132.
4. For problems affecting only the diskette drive:
a. If there is a diskette in the drive, make sure that:
v The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
v The diskette is good and not damaged; the drive LED light flashes once
per second when the diskette is inserted. (Try another diskette if you have
one.)
v The diskette contains the necessary files to start the blade server.
v The software program is working properly.
v The distance between monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Continue with step 6 on page 132.
5. For problems affecting only the CD or DVD drive:
a. Make sure that:
v The CD or DVD is inserted correctly in the drive. If necessary, insert the
end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release opening to
eject the CD or DVD. The drive LED light flashes once per second when
the CD or DVD is inserted.
v The CD or DVD is clean and not damaged. (Try another CD or DVD if
you have one.)
v The software program is working properly.
b. Continue with step 6 on page 132.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 131

 6. For problems affecting one or more of the removable media drives:
a. Reseat the following components:
1) Removable-media drive cable (if applicable)
2) Removable-media drive
3) Media tray cable (if applicable)
4) Media tray
b. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the blade server each time:
1) Removable-media drive cable (if applicable)
2) Media tray cable (if applicable)
3) Removable-media drive
4) Media tray
c. Continue with step 7.
7. Check for correct management-module operation (see the documentation for
your BladeCenter unit).

Note: Some BladeCenter unit types have several management-module

components that might need to be tested or replaced (see the Installation Guide
for your management module for more information).
8. Replace the management module (see the documentation for your BladeCenter
unit).

If these steps do not resolve the problem, it is likely a problem with the blade
server. See “CD or DVD drive problems” on page 114 or “Universal Serial Bus
(USB) port problems” on page 123.

132 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Network connection problems
To check for network connection problems, complete the following steps until the
problem is solved:
1. Make sure that:
v The network cables are securely connected to the I/O module.
v Power configuration of the BladeCenter unit supports the I/O module
configuration.
v Installation of the I/O-module type is supported by the BladeCenter unit and
blade server hardware.
v The I/O modules for the network interface that is being used are installed in
the correct BladeCenter bays, and are configured and operating correctly.
v The settings in the I/O module are correct for the blade server (settings in the
I/O module are specific to each blade server).
2. Check for correct I/O-module operation; troubleshoot and replace the I/O
module as indicated in the documentation for the I/O module.
3. Check for correct management-module operation (see the documentation for
your BladeCenter unit).

Note: Some BladeCenter unit types have several management-module

components that might need to be tested or replaced (see the Installation Guide
for your management module for more information).
4. Replace the management module (see the documentation for your BladeCenter
unit).

If these steps do not resolve the problem, it is likely a problem with the blade
server. See “Network connection problems” on page 120.

Power problems
To check for power problems, make sure that:
v The LEDs on all the BladeCenter power modules are lit.
v Power is being supplied to the BladeCenter unit.
v Installation of the blade server type is supported by the BladeCenter unit.
v The BladeCenter unit has the correct power configuration to operate the blade
bay where your blade server is installed (see the documentation for your
BladeCenter unit).
v The BladeCenter unit power management configuration and status support blade
server operation (see the Management Module User’s Guide or the Management
Module Command-Line Interface Reference Guide for information).
v Local power control for the blade server is correctly set (see the Management
Module User’s Guide or the Management Module Command-Line Interface
Reference Guide for information).
v The BladeCenter unit blowers are correctly installed and operational.

If these operations do not solve the problem, it is likely a problem with the blade
server. See “Power problems” on page 122.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 133

Video problems
To check for video problems, complete the following steps until the problem is
solved:
1. Make sure that:
v Both the blade server and the monitor are turned on, and that the monitor
brightness and contrast controls are correctly adjusted.
v The keyboard/video select button LED on the front of the blade server is lit,
indicating that the blade server is connected to the shared BladeCenter
monitor.
v The video cable is securely connected to the BladeCenter
management-module. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable
problems.
v The monitor works with another blade server.
v Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with
the monitor, see the information that comes with the monitor for instructions
for adjusting and testing the monitor. If the monitor self-tests show that the
monitor is working correctly, consider the location of the monitor. Magnetic
fields around other devices (such as transformers, appliances, fluorescent
lights, and other monitors) can cause screen jitter or wavy, unreadable,
rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens, turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the
monitor. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the
distance between the monitor and any diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3 in.).
2. Check for correct management-module operation (see the documentation for
your BladeCenter unit).

Note: Some BladeCenter unit types have several management-module

components that might need to be tested or replaced (see the Installation Guide
for your management module for more information).
3. Replace the monitor cable, if applicable.
4. Replace the monitor.
5. Replace the management module (see the documentation for your BladeCenter
unit).

If these steps do not resolve the problem, it is likely a problem with the blade
server. See “Monitor or video problems” on page 119.

134 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Solving undetermined problems
Note: When you are diagnosing a problem in the JS21 Type 7988 or 8844 blade
server, you must determine whether the problem is in the blade server or in the
BladeCenter unit.
v If all of the blade servers have the same symptom, it is probably a BladeCenter
unit problem; for more information, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual and
Troubleshooting Guide or Problem Determination and Service Guide for your
BladeCenter unit.
v If the BladeCenter unit contains more than one blade server and only one of the
blade servers has the problem, troubleshoot the blade server that has the
problem.

Check the LEDs on all the power supplies of the BladeCenter unit where the blade
server is installed. If the LEDs indicate that the power supplies are working
correctly, and reseating the blade server does not correct the problem, complete the
following steps:
1. Make sure that the control panel connector is correctly seated on the system
board (see “System-board connectors” on page 7 for the location of the
connector).
2. If no LEDs on the control panel are working, replace the bezel assembly; then,
try to power-on the blade server from the BladeCenter Web interface (see the
BladeCenter Management Module User’s Guide for more information).
3. Turn off the blade server.
4. Remove the blade server from the BladeCenter unit and remove the cover.
5. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Reinstall, turn on, and reconfigure the blade server each time.
v I/O expansion option.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB (two 512
MB DIMMs).
The following minimum configuration is required for the blade server to start:
v System-board and chassis assembly (with two microprocessors)
v Two 512 MB DIMMs
v A functioning BladeCenter unit
6. Install and turn on the blade server. If the problem remains, suspect the
following components in the following order:
a. DIMM
b. System-board and chassis assembly

If the problem is solved when you remove an I/O expansion option from the blade
server but the problem recurs when you reinstall the same expansion option,
suspect the expansion option; if the problem recurs when you replace the
expansion option with a different one, suspect the System-board and chassis
assembly.

If you suspect a networking problem and the blade server passes all the system
tests, suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the system.

Chapter 2. Diagnostics 135

Calling IBM for service
See Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 171 for
information about calling IBM for service.

When you call for service, have as much of the following information available as
possible:
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor and hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptoms
– Does the blade server fail the diagnostic programs? If so, what are the error
codes?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has the current server configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before it failed?
– Is this the original reported failure, or has this failure been reported before?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v BIOS code level
v Operating-system type and version level

You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking blade server. When you compare blade servers to
each other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following
factors are exactly the same in all of the blade servers:
v Machine type and model
v BIOS level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup

136 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844
The following replaceable components are available for the JS21 Type 7988 blade
server, and models 31X, 51X, E3X, and E5X of the JS21 Type 8844 blade server.

6
5
4

Replaceable components are of three types:

v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your blade server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 137

 CRU No. CRU No.
Index Description FRU No.
(Tier 1) (Tier 2)
1 Cover (all models) 42D8680
2 Bracket, expansion (all models) 32R2451
3 Memory, 512 MB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (model 31x) 39M5820
3 Memory, 512 MB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (option) 39M5820
3 Memory, 512 MB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (option) 41Y2706
3 Memory, 1 GB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (models 41x, 51x) 39M5808
3 Memory, 1 GB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (option) 39M5808
3 Memory, 1 GB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (model E3x) 41Y2710
3 Memory, 1 GB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (option) 41Y2710
3 Memory, 2 GB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (option) 39M5811
3 Memory, 2 GB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (model E5x) 41Y2714
3 Memory, 2 GB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (option) 41Y2714
3 Memory, 4 GB DDR2, PC2-3200, 400 MHz (option) 41Y2702
3 Memory, 4 GB DDR2, PC2-4200, 533 MHz (option) 41Y2722
4 Bezel assembly, OEM (Type 7988) 32R0858
4 Bezel assembly with control panel 32R2435
System-board and chassis assembly, with 2 PPC970MP
5 43X1813
dual-core microprocessors (Types 8844-51X, 8844-E5X)
System-board and chassis assembly, with 2 PPC970MP
5 43X1814
single-core microprocessors (Types 8844-31X, 8844-E3X)
System-board and chassis assembly, with 2 PPC970MP
5 44T5708
single-core microprocessors (Type 7988)
System-board and chassis assembly, with 2 PPC970MP
5 44T5709
dual-core microprocessors (Type 7988)
6 Hard disk drive, 36.4 GB SAS (option) 26K5778
6 Hard disk drive, 73.4 GB SAS (Types 8844-E3X, 8844-E5X) 26K5779
6 Hard disk drive, 73.4 GB SAS (option) 26K5779
6 Hard disk drive, 146.8 GB SAS (option) 42D0422
Tray, SAS hard disk drive (all models) 31R2239
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
Blade base 2.3 GHz, 2 way (models 31x, E3x) 46K7402
Blade base 2.3 GHz, 4 way (models 41x, 51x, E4x) 46K7405
Ethernet expansion card (option) 13N2306
Ethernet expansion card (option) 39Y9304
Ethernet expansion card (option) 39Y9308
Fibre channel expansion card (option) 26K4859
Fibre channel expansion card, 2 Gb (option) 26R0836
Fibre channel expansion card (option) 26R0837
Fibre channel expansion card (option) 26R0893
Fibre channel expansion card, 4 Gb (option) 39Y9184
Gigabit Ethernet Daughter Card (option) 13N2306

138 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 CRU No. CRU No.
Index Description FRU No.
(Tier 1) (Tier 2)
Gummo Gigabit Ethernet assembly (option) 46M5963
Infiniband expansion card (option) 26K6459
Infiniband expansion card, four-port (option) 32R1763
Kit, miscellaneous 32R2451
Label, FRU list (all models) 32R2434
Label, OEM (Type 7988) 44T5707
Label, system service (all models) 32R2433
Label, system service (Type 7988) 44T5704
Myrinet expansion card (option) 32R1845
Zeppo Fibre Channel daughter card assembly (option) 41Y8504

Chapter 3. Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844 139

140 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components
Replaceable components are of three types:
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your blade server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

See Chapter 3, “Parts listing, Types 7988 and 8844,” on page 137 to determine
whether a component is a Tier 1 CRU, Tier 2 CRU, or FRU.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.

Installation guidelines
Before you install options, read the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the guidelines in
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 142. This information will help you
work safely.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Before you remove a hot-swap blade server from the BladeCenter unit, you must
shut down the operating system and turn off the blade server. You do not have to
shut down the BladeCenter unit itself.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the blade server, open or close a latch, and so
on.
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the blade server
and operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the blade server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch
points on hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a
specific hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have
to perform before you remove or install the component.
v For a list of supported options for the blade server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 141

System reliability guidelines
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, observe the following
guidelines:
v Make sure that microprocessor socket 2 always contains either a microprocessor
heat sink filler or a microprocessor and heat sink. If the blade server has only
one microprocessor, it must be installed in the microprocessor socket 1.
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the BladeCenter unit without a
blade server, expansion unit, or filler blade installed in each blade bay. See the
documentation for your BladeCenter unit type for additional information.

Handling static-sensitive devices

Attention: Static electricity can damage the blade server and other electronic
devices. To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective
packages until you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the

following precautions:
v When working on the BladeCenter T unit, use an electrostatic discharge (ESD)
wrist strap, especially when you will be handling modules, options, and blade
servers. To work properly, the wrist strap must have a good contact at both ends
(touching your skin at one end and firmly connected to the ESD connector on the
front or back of the BladeCenter T unit).
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part of the BladeCenter unit or any unpainted metal surface on any other
grounded rack component in the rack you are installing the device in for at least
2 seconds. This drains static electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the blade server
without setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it
back into its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the blade
server cover or on a metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces
indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

Returning a device or component

If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

142 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the blade server from a BladeCenter unit
Attention:
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the BladeCenter unit without a
blade server, expansion unit, or blade filler installed in each blade bay.
v Note the bay number. Reinstalling a blade server into a different bay than the
one from which it was removed could have unintended consequences. Some
configuration information and update options are established according to bay
number; if you reinstall the blade server into a different bay, you might have to
reconfigure the blade server.

To remove the blade server from a BladeCenter unit, complete the following steps.

Release handles
(open)

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141 through “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 142.
2. If the blade server is operating, shut down the operating system; then, press the
power-control button (behind the blade server control panel door) to turn off the
blade server (see “Turning off the blade server” on page 7 for more information).
Attention: Wait at least 30 seconds, until the hard disk drives stop spinning,
before proceeding to the next step.
3. Open the two release handles. The blade server moves out of the bay
approximately 0.6 cm (0.25 inch).
4. Pull the blade server out of the bay. Spring-loaded doors further back in the bay
move into place to cover the bay temporarily.
5. Carefully lay the blade server down on a flat, non-conductive surface, with the
cover side up.
6. Place either a blade filler or another blade server in the bay within 1 minute.
The recessed spring-loaded doors will move out of the way as you insert the
blade or filler blade.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 143

Installing the blade server in a BladeCenter unit
To install a blade server in a BladeCenter unit, complete the following steps.

Release handles
(open)

Statement 21:

CAUTION:
Hazardous energy is present when the blade server is connected to the power
source. Always replace the blade cover before installing the blade server.
1. Make sure that the release handles on the blade server are in the open position
(perpendicular to the blade server).
2. If you installed a filler blade or another blade in the bay from which you
removed the blade server, remove it from the bay.
Attention: You must install the blade server in the same blade bay from which
you removed it. Some blade server configuration information and update options
are established according to bay number. Reinstalling a blade server into a
different blade bay from the one from which it was removed could have
unintended consequences, and you might have to reconfigure the blade server.
3. Slide the blade server into the blade bay from which you removed it until it
stops. The spring-loaded doors farther back in the bay that cover the bay
opening move out of the way as you insert the blade server.
4. Push the release handles on the front of the blade server closed.
5. Turn on the blade server (see “Turning on the blade server” on page 6 for
instructions) and make sure that the power-on LED on the blade control panel is
lit continuously, indicating that the blade server is receiving power and is turned
on.
6. (Optional) Write identifying information on one of the user labels that come with
the blade servers and place the label on the BladeCenter unit bezel.
Important: Do not place the label on the blade server or in any way block the
ventilation holes on the blade server (see the documentation that comes with
your BladeCenter unit for information about the label placement).

If you have changed the configuration of the blade server, or this is a different blade
server than the one you removed, you must configure the blade server and you
might have to install the blade server operating system (see the Installation and
User’s Guide for detailed information about these tasks).

144 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs
Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at
your request, you will be charged for the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing the blade server cover

To remove the blade server cover, complete the following steps.

Cover
pins
N
SIO
N
PA
E

EX
D
BLA

Blade-cover
release

Blade-cover
release

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Press the blade-cover release on each side of the blade server and lift the
cover open.
4. Lift the cover from the blade server and store it for future use.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 145

Installing the blade server cover
To install the blade server cover, complete the following steps.

Cover
pins

N
SIO
N
PA
E

EX
D
BLA

Blade-cover
release

Blade-cover
release

Statement 21:

CAUTION:
Hazardous energy is present when the blade server is connected to the power
source. Always replace the blade cover before installing the blade server.

Important: The blade server cannot be inserted into the BladeCenter unit until the
cover is installed and closed. Do not attempt to override this protection.
1. Lower the cover so that the slots at the rear slide down onto the pins at the rear
of the blade server. Before closing the cover, check that all components are
installed and seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts
inside the blade server.
2. Pivot the cover to the closed position until it clicks into place.
3. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

146 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the bezel assembly
To remove the bezel assembly, complete the following steps.

Bezel-assembly
release

Bezel-assembly
release
Bezel
Control-panel assembly
connector
Control-panel
cable

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Press the bezel-assembly release on each side of the blade server and pull the
bezel assembly away from the blade server approximately 1.2 cm (0.5 inch).
5. Disconnect the control-panel cable from the control-panel connector.
6. Pull the bezel assembly away from the blade server.
7. If you are instructed to return the bezel assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 147

Installing the bezel assembly
To install the bezel assembly, complete the following steps.

Bezel-assembly
release

Bezel-assembly
release
Bezel
Control-panel assembly
connector
Control-panel
cable

1. Connect the control-panel cable to the control-panel connector on the system

board.
2. Carefully slide the bezel assembly onto the blade server until it clicks into place.
3. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
4. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

148 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a SAS hard disk drive
To remove a SAS hard disk drive, complete the following steps.
SAS hard
disk drives

N
SIO
N
PA
E

EX
AD
BL

Release levers

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Locate the hard disk drive to be removed (see “System-board connectors” on
page 7 for the location of the hard disk drive connectors).
5. While pulling the blue release lever at the front of the hard disk drive tray, slide
the drive forward to disengage the connector; then, lift it out of the drive tray.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 149

Installing a SAS hard disk drive
To install a SAS hard disk drive, complete the following steps.
SAS hard
disk drives

N
SIO
N
PA
E

EX
AD
BL

Release levers

1. Identify the location in which the hard disk drive will be installed.
Attention: Do not press on the top of the drive. Pressing the top could
damage the drive.
2. Place the drive into the hard disk drive tray and push it toward the rear of the
drive, into the connector until the drive moves past the lever at the front of the
tray.
3. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
4. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

150 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a memory module
To remove a dual-inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps.

DIMM

Retaining clip

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Locate the DIMM connector that contains the DIMM that is to be replaced (see
“System-board connectors” on page 7 for DIMM slot locations).
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.
5. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end of the DIMM connector and
remove the DIMM.
6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 151

Installing a memory module
Note: If you are replacing a faulty DIMM, make sure that the replacement DIMM is
the correct type of memory. If you are adding DIMMs, install the DIMMs in the
sequence shown in the following table. See the Installation and User’s Guide for
additional information about the type of memory that is compatible with the blade
server.

Pair DIMM connectors

First 2 and 4
Second 1 and 3

To install a DIMM, complete the following steps.

DIMM

Retaining clip

1. Read the documentation that comes with the DIMMs.

2. Locate the DIMM connector into which the DIMM will be installed (see
“System-board connectors” on page 7 for DIMM slot locations).
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the BladeCenter unit or any unpainted metal surface on any
other grounded rack component; then, remove the DIMM from its package.
4. Make sure that both of the connector retaining clips are in the fully open
position.
5. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector on the
system board.
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.
6. Insert the DIMM by pressing the DIMM along the guides into the connector.
Make sure that the retaining clips snap into the closed positions.
Important: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the
DIMM has not been correctly installed. In this case, open the retaining clips and
remove the DIMM; then, reinsert the DIMM.
7. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
8. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

152 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and installing an I/O expansion card
The following sections describe how to remove and install small-form-factor and
standard-form-factor I/O expansion cards in the blade server.

Removing a small-form-factor expansion card

To remove a small-form-factor expansion card, complete the following steps.
Expansion card

PR S
IN
ES TAL
S LIN
H G
ER
E CA
W RD
H
EN

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Gently pivot the wide end of the card out of the expansion card connectors;
then, slide the notched end of the card out of the raised hooks on the system
board and lift the card out of the blade server.
5. If you are instructed to return the expansion card, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 153

 Installing a small-form-factor expansion card
To install a small-form-factor expansion card, complete the following steps.
Expansion card

PR S
IN
ES TAL
S LIN
H G
ER
E CA
W RD
H
EN

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the expansion card to any
unpainted metal surface on the BladeCenter unit or any unpainted metal surface
on any other grounded rack component; then, remove the expansion card from
its package.
2. Orient the expansion card over the system board.
3. Slide the notch in the narrow end of the card into the raised hooks on the
system board; then, gently pivot the card into the expansion card connectors.

Note: For device-driver and configuration information to complete the

installation of the expansion card, see the documentation that comes with the
expansion card.
4. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
5. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

154 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a standard-form-factor expansion card
To remove a standard-form-factor expansion card, complete the following steps.
Expansion card

RD
CA HEN
ING RE W
TALL HE
INS ESS
PR

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Gently pivot the wide end of the card out of the expansion card connectors;
then, slide the notched end of the card out of the raised hooks on the expansion
bracket and lift the card out of the blade server.
5. If you are instructed to return the expansion card, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 155

 Installing a standard-form-factor expansion card
To install a standard-form-factor expansion card, complete the following steps.
Expansion card

RD
CA HEN
ING RE W
TALL HE
INS ESS
PR

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the expansion card to any
unpainted metal surface on the BladeCenter unit or any unpainted metal surface
on any other grounded rack component; then, remove the expansion card from
its package.
2. Orient the expansion card and slide the notch in the narrow end of the card into
the raised hooks on the expansion bracket; then, gently pivot the wide end of
the card into the expansion card connectors.

Note: For device-driver and configuration information to complete the

installation of the expansion card, see the documentation that comes with the
expansion card.
3. Install the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on page
145).
4. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

156 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the battery
To remove the battery, complete the following steps.

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System-board connectors” on
page 7 for the location of the battery connector).
5. Use your finger to press down on one side of the battery; then, slide the battery
out from its socket. The spring mechanism will push the battery out toward you
as you slide it from the socket.

Note: You might need to lift the battery clip slightly with your fingernail to make
it easier to slide the battery.
6. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery clip.

Note: After you remove the battery, press gently on the clip to make sure that
the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket.

Installing the battery

The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the
battery in the blade server.
v When replacing the battery, you must replace it with a lithium battery of the same
type from the same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the blade server and reset
the system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 157

 Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To install the battery, complete the following steps.

1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
battery.
2. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket, under the battery clip.
Make sure that the side with the positive (+) symbol is facing up.
3. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the socket.
4. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
5. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).
6. Turn on the blade server and reset the system date and time through the
operating system that you installed. For additional information, see your
operating-system documentation.
7. Make sure that the boot list is correct using the management module Web
interface (see the management module documentation for more information) or
the SMS Utility (see “Using the SMS utility” on page 166 for more information).

158 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a hard disk drive tray
To remove a hard disk drive tray, complete the following steps.

Hard disk drive tray

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Remove the hard disk drive that is installed in the drive tray to be removed (see
“Removing a SAS hard disk drive” on page 149).
5. Remove the four screws that secure the drive tray to the system board and
remove the drive tray.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 159

Installing a hard disk drive tray
To install a hard disk drive tray, complete the following steps.

Hard disk drive tray

1. Place the drive tray into position on the system board and install the four screws
to secure it.
2. Install the hard disk drive that was removed from the drive tray (see “Installing a
SAS hard disk drive” on page 150 for instructions).
3. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
4. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

160 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the expansion bracket
To remove the expansion bracket, complete the following steps.

Expansion bracket

1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. If a standard-form-factor expansion card is installed, remove it (see “Removing
a standard-form-factor expansion card” on page 155).
5. Remove the two screws that secure the expansion bracket to the system board
and remove the expansion bracket.
6. If you are instructed to return the expansion bracket, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 161

Installing the expansion bracket
To install the expansion bracket, complete the following steps.

Expansion bracket

1. Place the expansion bracket in position on the system board and install the two
scews that secure it to the system board.
2. Install the standard-form-factor expansion card, if one was removed (see
“Installing a standard-form-factor expansion card” on page 156).
3. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146).
4. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit (see “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144).

162 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs
You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for the blade server.

Replacing the system-board and chassis assembly

This section describes how to replace the system-board and chassis assembly.
When replacing the system board, you will replace the system board, blade base
(chassis), microprocessors, and heat sinks as one assembly. After replacement, you
must either update the system with the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing
firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image.

Note: See “System-board layouts” on page 7 for more information on the locations
of the connectors, jumpers and LEDs on the system board.

To replace the system-board and chassis assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141
2. If the blade server is installed in a BladeCenter unit, remove it (see “Removing
the blade server from a BladeCenter unit” on page 143).
3. Remove the blade server cover (see “Removing the blade server cover” on
page 145).
4. Remove the blade server bezel assembly (see “Removing the bezel assembly”
on page 147).
5. Remove any of the installed components listed below from the system board;
then, place them on a non-conductive surface or install them on the new
system-board and chassis assembly.
v I/O expansion card. See “Removing and installing an I/O expansion card” on
page 153.
v Hard disk drives. See “Installing a SAS hard disk drive” on page 150.
v DIMMs. See “Removing a memory module” on page 151.
v Battery. See “Removing the battery” on page 157.
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system-board and
chassis assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the BladeCenter unit or
any unpainted metal surface on any other grounded rack component; then,
remove the assembly from its package.
7. Install any of the components listed below that were removed from the old
system-board and chassis assembly.
v I/O expansion card. See “Removing and installing an I/O expansion card” on
page 153.
v Hard disk drives. See “Installing a SAS hard disk drive” on page 150.
v DIMMs. See “Installing a memory module” on page 152.
v Battery. See “Installing the battery” on page 157.
8. Install the bezel assembly (see “Installing the bezel assembly” on page 148 for
instructions).
9. Install the blade server cover (see “Installing the blade server cover” on page
146 for instructions).

Chapter 4. Removing and replacing blade server components 163

 10. Write the machine type, model number, and serial number of the blade server
on the repair identification (RID) tag that comes with the replacement
system-board and chassis assembly. This information is on the identification
label that is behind the control-panel door on the front of the blade server.
Important:
v Completing the information on the RID tag ensures future entitlement for
service.
v The first time that you turn on the blade server after replacing the
system-board and chassis assembly, the firmware code will prompt you to
enter the blade-server serial number. If you enter an incorrect serial number,
the operating system that you installed might not work correctly, and you
might have to change your software-licensing agreement.
11. Place the RID tag on the bottom of the blade server chassis.
12. Install the blade server into the BladeCenter unit. See “Installing the blade
server in a BladeCenter unit” on page 144 for instructions.
13. Turn on the blade server and establish an SOL session (see the BladeCenter
Serial Over LAN Setup Guide for more information).
The blade server start-up sequence begins and stops at progress code D100.
14. For each of the following prompts, enter the information indicated:
D100 > Enter the serial number of the blade server
D101 > Re-enter the serial number to verify.
D102 > Enter the machine type (7988 or 8844) of the blade server.
D103 > Re-enter the machine type to verify.
D104 > Enter the model number of the blade server.
D105 > Re-enter the model number to verify.
15. Reset the system date and time through the operating system that you
installed. For additional information, see your operating-system documentation.

164 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions
This chapter provides information about updating the firmware and using the
configuration utilities.

Updating the firmware

IBM periodically makes firmware updates available for the blade server. Use the
following table to determine the methods you can use to install these firmware
updates.

Important: To avoid problems and to maintain proper system performance, always

ensure that the blade server BIOS, service processor, and diagnostic firmware
levels are consistent for all blade servers within the BladeCenter unit.

You can download the latest firmware from the IBM Support Web site at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/. Install the updated firmware using the
following methods:
v To update the service processor (BMC) firmware, use the management-module
Web interface (see the BladeCenter Management Module User’s Guide for more
information).
v To update the BIOS code, diagnostics, and firmware for the hard disk drive and
hard disk drive controller, use the update tools that are provided with your
operating system (see the documentation that comes with your operating system
for more information).

Configuring the blade server

While the firmware is running POST and before the operating system loads, a
POST menu with POST indicators is displayed. The POST indicators are the words
Memory, Keyboard, Network, SCSI, and Speaker that are displayed as each
component is tested. The POST menu provides the following configuration utilities.
v System management services (SMS)
Use the system management services (SMS) utility to view information about
your system or partition, and to perform tasks such as changing the boot list and
setting the network parameters. The SMS utility can be used for AIX or Linux
partitions. See “Using the SMS utility” on page 166 for more information.
v Default boot list
Use this utility to initiate a system boot in service mode through the default
service mode boot list. This mode attempts to boot from the first device of each
type found in the list.

Note: This is the preferred method of loading standalone AIX diagnostics from
CD.
v Stored boot list
Use this utility to initiate a system boot in service mode using the customized
service mode boot list that was set up by AIX when AIX was first booted, or
manually using the AIX service aids.
v Open firmware prompt
This utility is for advanced users of the IEEE 1275 specifications only.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 165

Using the SMS utility
This section provides the instructions to start the SMS utility and descriptions of the
menu choices.

Starting the SMS utility

Complete the following steps to start the SMS utility:
1. Turn on or restart the blade server, and establish an SOL session with it (see
the BladeCenter Management Module Command-Line Interface Reference
Guide or BladeCenter Serial-Over-LAN Setup Guide for more information.
2. When the POST menu and indicators are displayed, press the 1 key after the
word Keyboard appears and before the word Speaker appears.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.

SMS utility menu choices

The following choices are on the SMS utility main menu. Depending on the version
of the firmware in the blade server, some menu choices might differ slightly from
these descriptions.
v Select Language
Select this choice to change the language used to display the SMS menus.
v Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load)
Select this choice to enable and set up the remote startup capability of the blade
server or partition.
v Change SCSI Settings
Select this choice to view and change the addresses of the SCSI controllers
attached to the blade server.
v Select Console
Select this choice to select the console on which the SMS menus are displayed.
v Select Boot Options
Select this choice to view and set various options regarding the installation
devices and boot devices.

Note: If a device you are trying to select (such as a USB CD drive in the
BladeCenter media tray) is not displayed in the Select Device Type menu, select
List all Devices and choose the device from that menu.
v Firmware Boot Side Options
Select this choice to select the boot image (permanent or temporary) that will be
used the next time the blade server is started.
v Progress Indicator History
Select this choice to view the progress codes that were displayed on the console
during the current startup, the previous startup, and the previous failover startup.

166 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers
Two Ethernet controllers are integrated on the blade server system board. Each
controller provides a 1000-Mbps full-duplex interface for connecting to one of the
Ethernet-compatible I/O modules in I/O-module bays 1 and 2, which enables
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the Ethernet local area network
(LAN). Each Ethernet controller on the system board is routed to a different I/O
module in I/O-module bay 1 or bay 2. The routing from an Ethernet controller to an
I/O-module bay will vary according to the blade server type and the operating
system that is installed. See “Blade server Ethernet controller enumeration” on page
168 for information about how to determine the routing from an Ethernet controller
to an I/O-module bay for the blade server.

Note: Other types of blade servers, such as the BladeCenter HS20 Type 8678
blade server, that are installed in the same BladeCenter unit as the JS21 Type 7988
or 8844 blade server might have different Ethernet controller routing. See the
documentation that comes with the other blade servers for information.

You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers for the blade server
operating system. However, you must install a device driver to enable the blade
server operating system to address the Ethernet controllers. For device drivers and
information about configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the Broadcom NetXtreme
Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the blade server. For updated
information about configuring the controllers, see http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.

The Ethernet controllers in your blade server support failover, which provides
automatic redundancy for the Ethernet controllers. Without failover, only one
Ethernet controller can be connected from each server to each virtual LAN or
subnet. With failover, you can configure more than one Ethernet controller from
each server to attach to the same virtual LAN or subnet. Either one of the
integrated Ethernet controllers can be configured as the primary Ethernet controller.
If you have configured the controllers for failover and the primary link fails, the
secondary controller takes over. When the primary link is restored, the Ethernet
traffic switches back to the primary Ethernet controller. (See the operating-system
device-driver documentation for information about configuring for failover.)

Important: To support failover on the blade server Ethernet controllers, the Ethernet
switch modules in the BladeCenter unit must have identical configurations.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 167

Creating a CE login
If the blade server is running an AIX operating system, it is recommended that a
customer engineer (CE) login be created that enables a user to perform operating
system commands that are required to service the system without being logged in
as a root user. This login must have a role of Run Diagnostics and a primary group
of System. This enables the user to:
v Run the diagnostics including the service aids, certify, and format.
v Run all the operating system commands run by system group users.
v Configure and unconfigure devices that are not in use.

In addition, this login can have Shutdown Group enabled to allow:

v Use of the Update System Microcode service aid.
v Use of shutdown and reboot operations.

The recommended CE login user name is qserv.

Blade server Ethernet controller enumeration

The enumeration of the Ethernet controllers in a blade server is operating-system
dependent. You can verify the Ethernet controller designations that a blade server
uses through the operating-system settings.

The routing of an Ethernet controller to a particular I/O-module bay depends on the

type of blade server. You can verify which Ethernet controller is routed to which
I/O-module bay by using the following test:
1. Install only one Ethernet switch module or pass-thru module in I/O-module bay
1.
2. Make sure that the ports on the switch module or pass-thru module are enabled
(click I/O Module Tasks → Admin/Power/Restart in the management-module
Web interface).
3. Enable only one of the Ethernet controllers on the blade server. Note the
designation that the blade server operating system has for the controller.
4. Ping an external computer on the network that is connected to the switch
module or pass-thru module. If you can ping the external computer, the Ethernet
controller that you enabled is associated with the switch module or pass-thru
module in I/O-module bay 1. The other Ethernet controller in the blade server is
associated with the switch module or pass-thru module in I/O-module bay 2.

If you have installed an I/O expansion card in the blade server, communications
from the expansion card should be routed to I/O-module bays 3 and 4, if these bays
are supported by your BladeCenter unit. You can verify which controller on the card
is routed to which I/O-module bay by performing the same test and using a
controller on the expansion card and a compatible switch module or pass-thru
module in I/O-module bay 3 or 4.

168 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Configuring a SAS RAID array
Configuring a SAS RAID array applies to a blade server in which two SAS hard disk
drives are installed.

Two SAS hard disk drives in the blade server can be used to implement and
manage RAID level-0 and RAID level-1 arrays in operating systems that are on the
ServerProven list at http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
For the blade server, you must configure the SAS RAID array using the Standalone
Diagnostics CD.

Important: Depending on your RAID configuration, you must create the array
before you install the operating system in the blade server.

Before you can create a RAID array, you must reformat the hard disk drives so that
the sector size of the drives changes from 512 bytes to 528 bytes. If you later
decide to remove the hard disk drives, delete the RAID array before you remove
the drives.

Updating IBM Director

If you plan to use IBM Director to manage the blade server, you must check for the
latest applicable IBM Director updates and interim fixes.

To install the IBM Director updates and any other applicable updates and interim
fixes, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Check for the latest version of IBM Director:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/xseries/systems_management/
xseries_sm/dwnl.html.
b. If the drop-down list shows a newer version of IBM Director than what
comes with the blade server, follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the latest version.
2. Install IBM Director.
3. Download and install any applicable updates or interim fixes for the blade
server:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, click BladeCenter.
c. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
d. Click BladeCenter JS21 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
blade server.

Chapter 5. Configuration information and instructions 169

Checking the status of the media tray
If you are installing the blade server in a BladeCenter unit other than a Type 8677
BladeCenter unit, this topic does not apply.

Important: If you received a Type 8677 BladeCenter unit before June 2003, the
customer interface card (CIC) in the media tray of the BladeCenter unit might have
to be replaced before the optical drive will work correctly with a JS21 Type 7988 or
8844 blade server.

If you received your Type 8677 BladeCenter unit before June 2003, start the
management-module Web interface and complete the following steps to determine
whether the CIC in your BladeCenter unit must be replaced:
1. In the navigation pane on the left side, select Monitors; then, select Hardware
VPD.
2. In the BladeCenter Hardware VPD table in the right pane, find the row for
module name Media Tray.
3. If the field replaceable unit (FRU) number for the media tray is 59P6629, have
the CIC replaced before you install a JS21 Type 7988 or 8844 blade server in
the BladeCenter unit.

To have the CIC replaced, call the IBM Support Center, report the CIC as a failed
part, and request replacement with the latest CIC FRU. The IBM Support Center
team will evaluate the problem, determine which replacement part is required, and
send the applicable part. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378). In other countries, go to http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ to locate
your support telephone numbers. (Instructions for removing and replacing parts in
the media tray of the BladeCenter unit are provided in the BladeCenter Type 8677
Problem Determination and Service Guide or BladeCenter Type 8677 Hardware
Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide.)

170 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This appendix contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your BladeCenter product or optional device, and whom to call for service, if it
is necessary.

Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
in the Hardware Maintenance Manual and Troubleshooting Guide or Problem
Determination and Service Guide on the IBM Documentation CD that comes with
your system.
v Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and click BladeCenter to check for
information to help you solve the problem.

You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with BladeCenter systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform. Most BladeCenter systems, operating systems, and programs come with
documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error
messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the
documentation for the software.

Using the documentation

Information about your IBM BladeCenter system and preinstalled software, if any, or
optional device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and
help files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, some documents are available through the IBM Publications
Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/.

Getting help and information from the World Wide Web

On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
BladeCenter systems, optional devices, services, and support at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 171

Software service and support
Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with BladeCenter products. For information
about which products are supported by Support Line in your country or region, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.

For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through IBM Services or through your IBM
reseller, if your reseller is authorized by IBM to provide warranty service. See
http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support telephone numbers, or in the U.S. and
Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).

In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

IBM Taiwan product service

IBM Taiwan product service contact information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888

172 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 173

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
in the United States, other countries, or both:

Active Memory IBM TechConnect

Active PCI IBM (logo) Tivoli
Active PCI-X IntelliStation Tivoli Enterprise
AIX NetBAY Update Connector
Alert on LAN Netfinity Wake on LAN
BladeCenter Predictive Failure Analysis XA-32
Chipkill ServeRAID XA-64
e-business logo ServerGuide X-Architecture
Eserver ServerProven XpandOnDemand
FlashCopy System x xSeries
i5/OS

Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.

Adaptec and HostRAID are trademarks of Adaptec, Inc., in the United States, other
countries, or both.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States
and other countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of

others.

Important notes
Processor speeds indicate the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.

CD drive speeds list the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often less
than the maximum possible.

When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for approximately 1000 bytes, MB stands for approximately 1 000 000
bytes, and GB stands for approximately 1 000 000 000 bytes.

174 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity may vary depending on operating environments.

Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives available from IBM.

Maximum memory may require replacement of the standard memory with an

optional memory module.

IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and

services that are ServerProven, including but not limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered and
warranted solely by third parties.

IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.

Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.

Some software may differ from its retail version (if available), and may not include
user manuals or all program functionality.

Product recycling and disposal

This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national
regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a
variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product
recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at http://www.ibm.com/ibm/
environment/products/prp.shtml.

Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la

normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos
de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos
cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y
servicios de devolución de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de
IBM http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.

This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC

concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as

Appendix B. Notices 175

 applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end
of life per this Directive.

Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne

et à la Norvège.

L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de

Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers
l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin
de vie.

In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and
treatment, contact your local IBM representative.

Battery return program

This product may contain a sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of
batteries outside the United States, go to http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/
products/batteryrecycle.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility.

In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or
proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
and battery packs from IBM equipment. For information on proper disposal of these
batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Have the IBM part number listed on the
battery available prior to your call.

For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.

176 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
For the European Union:

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).

Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European

Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux

directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la
marche à suivre en vigueur dans l'Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.

In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators

are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers
for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local
IBM representative.

For California:

Perchlorate material – special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.

The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations

Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate
Materials. This product/part may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which
contains a perchlorate substance.

Appendix B. Notices 177

Electronic emission notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement

Notice to Customers

This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect

connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.

European Union EMC Directive conformance statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN

178 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: [email protected]

Taiwanese Class A warning statement

Chinese Class A warning statement

Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement

Appendix B. Notices 179

180 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Index
A configuration
default boot list 165
AIX operating system
minimum 135
using the reject function 128
open firmware prompt 165
array, SAS RAID 169
SAS RAID 169
attention codes 34
stored boot list 165
attention notices 2
system management services (SMS) 165
configuring the blade server 165
connectors
B battery 7
baseboard management controller (BMC) I/O expansion card 7
features 3 memory 7
specifications 3 microprocessor 7
battery SCSI 7
connector 7 system board 7
installing 157 control panel, buttons and LEDs 4
removing 157 controller
battery, replacing 157 enumeration 168
bezel assembly Ethernet 167
installing 148 cover
removing 147 installing 146
blade server opening 145
features 3 creating
installing 144 CE login 168
removing 143
specifications 3
blade server cover
installing 146
D
danger statements 2
removing 145
daughter card
BladeCenter unit
I/O expansion card 153
failover support through Ethernet switch
diagnostic
modules 167
tools, overview 9
media tray, checking the status of 170
DIMM.
buttons
See memory module
CD/diskette/USB 5
diskette drive
control panel 4
problems 115
keyboard/video 4
display problems 119
power-control 5
documentation, online 1
drive
specifications 3
C DVD drive problems 114
caution statements 2
CD drive problems 114
CE login, creating 168
checking the status of the media tray 170
E
electrical specifications 3
checkout procedure
electronic emission Class A notice 178
about 106
entitlement for service, transferring 164
performing 106
environmental specifications 3
checkpoint codes
error codes 9, 37
attention codes 34
error LEDs 124
error codes 37
error log
location codes 66
entries 5
progress codes 10
error symptoms
Chipkill memory 3
CD drive, DVD drive 114
Class A electronic emission notice 178
general 115
committing TEMP image 129
hard disk drive 116
components
intermittent 116
system board 7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007 181

error symptoms (continued) installing (continued)
microprocessor 118 hard disk drive tray 160
monitor 119 I/O expansion card 153
optional devices 121 memory module 152
software 123 SAS hard disk drive 150
USB port 123 small-form-factor expansion card 154
video 119 standard-form-factor expansion card 156
errors integrated functions 3
light path LEDs 125 intermittent problems 116
Ethernet controller
configuring 167
enumeration 168 J
failover 167 jumper, system firmware code
redundant network connection 167 starting the TEMP image 127, 128
specifications 3 jumpers, system board 8
expansion bracket
installing 162
removing 161 K
keyboard problems 117

F
failover support through Ethernet switch modules 167 L
FCC Class A notice 178 LEDs
features activity 5
baseboard management controller (BMC) 3 blade-error 5
blade server 3 control panel 4
filler error, locations 124
microprocessor heat sink 142 information 5
firmware light path diagnostics 124
problem isolation 127 light path, locations 124
recovering 127 location 5
updates 165 power-on 5
system board 8
light path diagnostics 124
H light path diagnostics LEDs 125
hard disk drive light path diagnostics panel 8
problems 116 light path LED locations 124
specifications 3 Linux operating system
hard disk drive tray using the reject function 128
installing 160 location codes 66
removing 159
hard disk drive, installing 150
hard disk drive, removing 149 M
memory module
installing 152
I removing 151
I/O expansion card specifications 3
daughter card 153 supported 3
IBM Director memory problems 118
updating 169 memory specifications 3
Web sites 169 microprocessor
image problems 118
PERM 128 microprocessor specifications 3
TEMP 128 minimum configuration 135
important notices 2 monitor problems 119
install blade server 144
installing
battery 157 N
bezel assembly 148 network connection problems 120
blade server cover 146 notes 2
expansion bracket 162

182 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide
notes, important 174 removing (continued)
notices expansion bracket 161
electronic emission 178 hard disk drive tray 159
FCC, Class A 178 I/O expansion card 153
product recycling 175 memory module 151
notices and statements 2 SAS hard disk drive 149
small-form-factor expansion card 153
standard-form-factor expansion card 155
O repair identification (RID) tag 164
online documentation 1 replacing
optional device problems 121 system-board and chassis assembly 163

P S
parts listing 137 SAS hard disk drive
PERM image installing 150
starting 127 removing 149
POST SAS RAID
about 9 configuring 169
checkpoint codes 9 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
power problems 122 drive
power-on self-test (POST) 9 specifications 3
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) 3 service entitlement, transferring 164
problem isolation, firmware 127 service processor (BMC)
problems features 3
CD, DVD drive 114 specifications 3
diskette drive 115 service processor problems 123
general 115 service, calling for 136
hard disk drive 116 small-form-factor expansion card
intermittent 116 installing 154
keyboard 117 removing 153
memory 118 software problems 123
microprocessor 118 specifications 3
monitor 119 standard-form-factor expansion card
network connection 120 installing 156
optional devices 121 removing 155
power 122 starting
service processor 123 PERM image 127
software 123 starting the blade server 6
startup 112 startup problems 112
undetermined 135 statements and notices 2
USB port 123 stopping the blade server 7
video 119 system board
product recycling 175 connectors 7
progress codes 9, 10 jumpers 8
publications 1 LEDs 8
system board layouts 7
system firmware
R committing TEMP image 129
RAID verifying levels 129
configuring a SAS array 169 system management services (SMS)
recovering about 165
system firmware 127 menu choices 166
TEMP image from PERM image 128 starting 166
recycling 175 system management services (SMS) utility 166
reject function, TEMP image 128 system reliability 142
remove blade server 143 system-board and chassis assembly
removing replacing 163
battery 157
blade bezel assembly 147
blade server cover 145

Index 183
T
TEMP image
recovering 128
reject function 128
tools, diagnostic 9
trademarks 174
troubleshooting tables 113
turning off the blade server 7
turning on the blade server 6

U
undetermined problems 135
United States electronic emission Class A notice 178
United States FCC Class A notice 178
Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 123
updating
firmware 165
IBM Director 169
utility
default boot list 165
open firmware prompt 165
stored boot list 165
system management services (SMS) 165

V
verifying system firmware levels 129
video problems 119

W
Web site
IBM Director 169
product recycling 175

184 BladeCenter JS21 Types 7988 and 8844: Problem Determination and Service Guide



Part Number: 49Y0169

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 49Y0169